Technical Report - Environment Protection Department

Submission 5.1

Report on Environmental Laboratories, SOPs for

Environmental Sampling, Recommendations on

Environmental Quality Standards, Environmental

Modelling, Monitoring Framework and Curriculum

Restructuring and Capacity Building of

Environmental Protection Department Punjab

Technical Report

Restructuring and Capacity Building of

Environmental Protection Department Punjab

1. Inception Report

2. Gap Analysis Report

3. Restructuring Report

3.1: Training Need Assessment Report

3.2: Restructuring of Environmental Governance in Punjab

4. Legal Report

4.1: Report on Multilateral Environmental Agreements

4.2: Environmental Governance and Monitoring Framework of Punjab

4.3: New and Amended Laws, Rules, Regulations, Guidelines, SOPs, Checklists

5. Technical Report

5.1: Environmental Laboratories, SOPs for Environmental Sampling, Recommendations on

Environmental Quality Standards, Environmental Modelling, Monitoring Framework and

Curriculum

5.2: Environmental Approvals/EIAs, Market-based Instrument for Environmental Management

6. Information and Communication Technology Solutions Report

7. Final Report

DISCLAIMER

Urban Sector Planning and Management Sector Unit (Private.) Limited, (USPMSU) has prepared this

report for purpose of Restructuring and Capacity Building of Environmental Protection Department

(EPD). Extreme care and caution has been observed while developing this document.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or

mechanical, including photocopying, recording or information storage and retrieval system, without

the express permission, in writing, by competent authority.

Authors

Mr. Tapio Reinikainen

Mr. Ville Hokka

Mr. Julien Perez

Mr. Abid Hussainy

Mr. Hassan Ilyas

Ms. Anza Javaid

Ms. Saba Sarfraz

Technical Review Team

Mr. Alexis Gazzo

Ms. Auli Keinänen

Dr. Nasir Javed

The Urban Unit

503-Shaheen Complex, Egerton road, Lahore

Tel: +42 992005316-22

Fax : +42 99205323

Email: [email protected]

Website: www.urbanunit.gov.pk

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Environmental Laboratories Section 1: Need Assessment of Environmental Laboratories and Monitoring Stations

Introduction / Current Situation ............................................................................................................ 16

Recommendations for Improving Management of Laboratories .......................................................... 17

Practical Steps For Corrective Measures .............................................................................................. 18

Procedures and Outputs/Results of Establishment of Well Managed Environmental

Laboratory/EMC ................................................................................................................................... 19

Capacity Building and Preliminary Needs Analysis ............................................................................. 21

Section 2: Certification of Environmental Laboratories

Certification Criteria ............................................................................................................................. 26

Process Flow ......................................................................................................................................... 26

SOPs for Inspection and Certification .................................................................................................. 28

Registration Application Of Environmental Laboratories .................................................................... 28

Renewal Application Of Environmental Laboratories .......................................................................... 28

Certification Application Of Environmental Laboratories ................................................................... 28

Lab Inspection Report ........................................................................................................................... 32

Section 3: Quality Assurance / Quality Control System

Quality Assurance / Quality Control System ........................................................................................ 40

Section 4: Accreditation

Requirements ........................................................................................................................................ 46

Continuing Accreditation ...................................................................................................................... 46

Accreditation Application By PNAC .................................................................................................... 46

Section 5: Environmental Sampling and Rate Analysis

Environmental Rates ............................................................................................................................. 60

Chapter 2: Standard Operating Procedures Section 1: Standard Operating Procedures for Environmental Sampling

Standard Operating Procedures For Environmental Sampling ............................................................. 68

1.Water ............................................................................................................................................. 68

2.Wastewater .................................................................................................................................... 77

3. Industrial Gaseous Emissions ..................................................................................................... 82

4. Motor Vehicle Exhaust And Noise .............................................................................................. 84

5.Ambient Air .................................................................................................................................. 86

6. Types Of Sampling (Grab, Composite, Integrated) ..................................................................... 86

Section 2: Standard Operating Procedures for Testing and Analysis

Standard Operating Procedures For Testing And Analysis .................................................................. 92

1. Organics/Physiochemical .................................................................................................................. 92

i. Standard Operating Procedure For Total Dissolved Solids (Tds) ................................................. 92

ii. Standard Operating Procedure For Total Suspended Solids (Tss) ............................................... 93

iii. Standard Operating Procedure For Ph ........................................................................................ 94

iv. Standard Operating Procedure For Biological Oxygen Demand (Bod) ...................................... 95

v. Standard Operating Procedure For Chemical Oxygen Demand (Cod) ........................................ 99

vi. Standard Operating Procedure For Chlorides (Cl-) .................................................................. 100

vii. Standard Operating Procedure For Free Chlorine.................................................................... 102

viii. Standard Operating Procedure For Sulfide (S2-) .................................................................... 105

ix. Standard Operating Procedure For Ammonia (Nh3) ................................................................. 106

x. Standard Operating Procedure For Fluoride (F-)........................................................................ 108

xi. Standard Operating Procedure For Cyanide (Cn-) Total ........................................................... 109

2.Ambient Air And Gaseous Emissions ............................................................................................. 110

3. Heavy Metals .................................................................................................................................. 111

4. Microbiological Analysis ................................................................................................................ 113

Chapter 3: Environmental Quality Standards Section 1: Comparative Analysis of Environmental Quality Standards

Comparative Analysis of Environmental Quality Standards .............................................................. 120

1. Municipal & Liquid Industrial Effluents .................................................................................... 120

2. Industrial Gaseous Emissions .................................................................................................... 122

3. Motor Vehicle Exhaust & Noise ................................................................................................ 123

4. Ambient Air ............................................................................................................................... 124

5. Drinking Water Quality ............................................................................................................. 125

6. Noise .......................................................................................................................................... 127

7. Treatment Of Liquid And Disposal Of Bio-Medical Waste By Incineration, Autoclaving,

Microwaving And Deep Burial ...................................................................................................... 128

Chapter 4: Environmental Modelling Section 1: Introduction and Scope

Introduction And Scope ...................................................................................................................... 134

Section 2: Environmental Modelling Framework

Environmental Modelling Framework ................................................................................................ 138

1. Dispersion Modelling ...................................................................................................................... 138

2. Receptor Modelling ........................................................................................................................ 147

3. Surface Water Modelling ................................................................................................................ 151

4. Groundwater Modelling .................................................................................................................. 153

Section 3: Recommendations for Workable Models for Environmental Modelling

Recommendations for Workable Models for Environmental Modelling 162

Environmental Modelling for EIA ...................................................................................................... 163

Application of Modelling in IEE/EIA ................................................................................................. 163

Chapter 5: Environmental Monitoring and Reporting

Framework Section 1: Introduction and Background

Introduction and Background ............................................................................................................. 171

Section 2: Principles for Environmental Monitoring nad Reporting

Principles For Environmental Monitoring And Reporting ................................................................. 177

Section 3: Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Framework

Methods for Environmental Monitoring ............................................................................................. 182

Framework for Ambient Environment Monitoring and Reporting ..................................................... 183

What to Monitor? ................................................................................................................................ 190

Environmental Monitoring Plan For Punjab ....................................................................................... 197

Air Quality Monitoring Plan .......................................................................................................... 197

Ground Water Monitoring Plan ..................................................................................................... 203

Surface Water Monitoring Plan ..................................................................................................... 206

Monitoring of Drinking Water ....................................................................................................... 216

Monitoring of Hazardous Substances ............................................................................................ 216

Monitoring of Noise ....................................................................................................................... 218

Monitoring of Biodiversity ............................................................................................................ 218

Compliance Monitoring And Inspection ............................................................................................. 219

Policy Recommendations For Environmental Monitoring And Reporting ........................................ 224

Annexure…………………………………………………………………………………………….226

Acronyms ADMS Atmospheric Dispersion Modelling System

APHA American Public Health Association

BOD Biological Oxygen Demand

CCS Carbon Capture and Storage

COD Chemical Oxygen Demand

DPSIR Driving force Pressure State Impact Response

EMIN Environmental Monitoring and Indicators Network

EPD Environment Protection Department

EP&CCD Environment Protection and Climate Change Department

ICP Inductively Coupled Plasma

IETT Institute of Environmental Technology and Training

LIMS Laboratory Information Management System

LIR Lab Inspection Report

MEAs Multilateral Environmental Agreements

NTU Nephelometric Turbidity

PCEI Provincial Core set of Environmental Indicator

POPs Persistent Organic Pollutants

PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

QA/QC Quality Assurance/Quality Control

SoE State of Environment

SoER State of Environment Report

SOP Standard Operating Procedure

TDS Total Dissolved Solids

TFE Tetrafluoroethylene

TSS Total Suspended Solids

USEPA United States Environment Protection Agency

Executive Summary Environmental Laboratories form the backbone of Environmental Monitoring which is one of the key

tasks of an Environment Protection Agency (EPA). The environmental laboratories of EPA have been

envisioned to constitute a significant part of Environmental Monitoring Centre (EMC). EMC will

monitor environmental quality of Punjab and produce results that would be defendable and provide a

basis for stringent enforcement. In order for EMC to be a reference lab, for testing and analysis in

Punjab, it needs to overcome the existing gaps and develop measures and systems for operation and

maintenance that comply with ISO 17025. Need assessment of these labs would enable the authorities

to recognize the gaps in the functionality, equipment, quality of work, health and safety measures and

sustainability etc. and help identify possible solutions to fill the gaps. A framework for development

of quality management for the laboratories would also be proposed.

EPA is required to certify laboratories to conduct tests and analysis of environmental quality

parameters and get accreditation for its own establishment, under EMC, from Pakistan National

Accreditation Council (PNAC). The existing system has not been capable enough to get accreditation

and has also been inefficient in performing certification due to a variety of reasons which has

inculcated dissent and resentment between EPA and the public/private labs applying for certification.

Hence, the process had to be streamlined and automated to make evaluation easier and response

timely. A GIS/MIS based system has been designed for providing certification as a solution to make

the application and scrutiny of the cases easy, transparent and thorough. Once all the documentation

of the labs is complete and all systems are in place, EMC can also apply for accreditation according to

the criteria mentioned.

An environmental lab must have a QA/QC system in place which is designed to identify policies,

organization, objectives, functional activities, and Quality Assurance/Quality Control activities aimed

at achieving quality goals desired for operation of a laboratory. A QA/QC manual is primarily

intended for use by laboratory personnel to ensure reliability of results. It is important for a testing lab

that the QA/QC manual should be in compliance with ISO 17025 criteria as a benchmark as proposed.

EMC laboratories need to be financially sustainable in order for them to function smoothly and

conduct regular O&M. Existing lab has rates set for sampling and testing of environmental quality

parameters but these are outdated, as they were last notified in 2013, and need to be revised. Hence,

feasible rates to provide testing and analysis facilities to stakeholders and also to make the EPA labs

self-sustainable are proposed. Proposed rates reflect the market prices in order to provide relief to

industries and stakeholders and encourage monitoring and reporting

Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are a set of instructions to provide step-by step guidance to

their personnel in carrying out a specific task or function. SOPs are usually created on a standard

format to assist workers for complex routine operations. The idea is to improve efficiency,

consistency and quality of output. An environmental lab should have standardized SOPs for sampling

and testing and analysis and user manuals for operation and handling of complex equipment in order

to get verifiable and good quality results.

Establishing a comprehensive environmental monitoring mechanism is essential for ensuring and

safeguarding the environment for maintaining its goods and services to sustain development in the

province. This report sets the framework for environmental monitoring and reporting that on one hand

serves the operative needs of environmental permitting, EIA’s, IEE’s and complaint handlings, but on

the other hand it serves the vitally important assessment of trends in the environment by monitoring

indicators defined in Sustainable Development Goals and for provincial purposes through setting of

core environmental indicators for the province.

The report deliberates the future state of Punjab Environmental monitoring Center (EMC) as a

separate scientific oriented expert organization to produce high quality environmental data and

information through certified sampling and laboratory procedures. The Punjab EMC will also act as a

reference laboratory for other government labs and private sector laboratories and produce State of

Environment Report (SoER) as a result of ambient environment and regulatory monitoring. The report

focuses on overall approach and methods for monitoring and reporting and proposes Environmental

Monitoring and Indicators Network (EMIN) process for selecting indicators for Provincial Core Set of

Environmental Indicators (PCEI).

For State of Environment reporting, the report provides Driving force-Pressure-State-Impact-

Response (DPSIR) model in order to design environmental monitoring programmes for Punjab in a

cost-effective way. This model will help the department and agency to support decision making

through the provision of credible environmental information. This will also help to present the

environmental indicators needed to provide feedback to policy makers on environmental quality and

the resulting impact of the political choices made, or to be made in the future. It also covers the

monitoring intensity/environmental monitoring plan for the province, approach for compliance

monitoring and prosecution of polluters and policy recommendations for improvement of monitoring

and reporting in the province.

Chapter 1

Environmental Laboratories

Section 1

Need Assessment of Environmental

Laboratories and Monitoring

Stations

Section 1 of Chapter 1 Need assessment of environmental laboratories & monitoring stations

Technical Report – Submission 5.1 Page No 16

Section 1

Need Assessment of Environmental

Laboratories and Monitoring Stations INTRODUCTION / CURRENT SITUATION

Monitoring for environmental quality is a mandatory function of EPA Punjab which is bound by the

Punjab Environmental Protection Act, 2012 in Section 6 (1) (i) to;

“Establish systems and procedures for surveys, surveillance, monitoring, measurement, examination,

investigation, research, inspection and audit to prevent and control pollution, and to estimate the

costs of cleaning up pollution and rehabilitating the environment in various sector.”

Environmental laboratories form the backbone of environmental monitoring. Currently the situation

of EPA environmental laboratories is not in a level required for producing defendable results for

stringent enforcement, but there are some signs for positive developments at the EPA central

laboratory, which is planned to form the heart of a future Environmental Monitoring Center (EMC).

Regional laboratories are not operational at the moment.

During the first visits of the consultant to the central laboratory of EPA, it was in a development

phase. Some air conditioned rooms had brand new sophisticated equipment like ICP, AAS and GC,

but activity was only about to be started with the ICP, which is able analyse 72 metallic parameters

within minutes. That was in a process of calibration with standard solutions. The differences in test

results seemed minimal. EPA had also hired three MSc level experts in analytical chemistry to run

this equipment after training. These are positive efforts and need to be strengthened. Another part of

the lab was consisting of equipment, like oxygen analyser, incubation cupboards etc. to make basic

analyses on mainly fresh water and waste water. In this laboratory the ventilation was not functional

at that time and needed urgently action in order to guarantee good quality of analysis results. The third

part of the laboratory was storage for analysis chemicals, which room was also used as an office. The

room was a mess, but later on it was reorganised. There were toxic and carcinogenic chemicals like

carbon tetrachloride (CTC), which is also ozone depleting substance laying in cardboard boxes with

acids and flammable substances alongside with other chemicals, some of them already outdated and

obsolete. There were also piles of document everywhere. This is against any OHS regulations and it

was later corrected as advised.

The situation with the regional laboratories is not very clear, but obviously there is a lack of skilled

personnel, probably lack of proper equipment and lack operational management rules.

Some representatives of private labs have expressed their worries that the EPA EMC would start to

compete with private labs. That worry should be unnecessary as the EMC shall target in doing

comparative analysis of the same recipient as the self-monitoring of industries performed by private

labs and serves as a high quality reference laboratory in the future.

There is more about the current situation of the laboratories in the combined gap analysis report (UU-

EY-FCG), including gaps in analysing ambient air, water and waste water. The report describes

details of the following:

availability of laboratory equipment, monitoring stations and mobile monitoring units and

gaps in their use and functionality

gaps in the usage of international standards

gaps in OHS measures



availability of SOPs

aspects of lack of financial sustainability

aspects of quality assurance system and accreditation

existing environmental quality standards

As a general conclusion there is still a long way for the EMC or EPA central laboratory to be an ISO

17025 certified lab. There is clear possibility for development, but lots of training is needed. Currently

there is obviously also lack of trust between different stakeholders (between organisations and within

organisations), which hampers the smooth cooperation and quality monitoring.

Laboratory work is only one part of the monitoring. Trained field staff will also be needed to take

samples and monitoring programmes to be designed and implemented.

The reasons for establishing monitoring programs include:

ensuring the health of ecosystems and species

protection of human health

ensuring the compliance with legislation

reducing pollution levels

preserving natural resources

protecting biodiversity

protecting ecosystem services

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR IMPROVING MANAGEMENT OF LABORATORIES

In a functional model there should be a high level, well equipped, ISO 17025 certified reference

laboratory with well trained staff, Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS), all SOPs in

place and strictly followed for more complicated analysis and controlling of quality of EPA regional

laboratories and private environmental laboratories. In addition seven to nine good quality regional

laboratories are needed to perform sampling and analysis of a limited amount of parameters, as well

as adequate number of good private laboratories.

In order to improve the management of laboratories the following objectives will have to be fulfilled:

1) To establish an Environmental Monitoring Centre (EMC) under the Environmental Protection

Department of Punjab

2) To enhance the quality of current central laboratory by aiming for the international

accreditation for ISO 17025 (General requirements for the competence of testing and

calibration laboratories).

3) To enhance/rebuild the operations of regional laboratories and capacities of laboratory staff to

take representative environmental samples and carry out analysis professionally to attain

defendable and reliable data and information for evidence based decision making in regions.

4) To facilitate the certification of private environmental laboratories and set requirements for

quality control and update and renewal of them and organize the co-operation within the

private sector to support the emerging market.

5) To establish a thorough capacity programme, based on training needs assessment of

laboratory staff and inventories in laboratories.

The laboratory needs to comply with ISO 17025. A practical guidebook is needed for meeting the

requirements of laboratory accreditation schemes based on ISO 17025:2005 or equivalent national

standard.



PRACTICAL STEPS FOR CORRECTIVE MEASURES

The steps needed for EPA Punjab for reaching the objectives of the complete system of management

of environmental laboratories are illustrated in the Fig. 1.1.

Fig. 1.1: Framework for development of quality management for laboratories

The major steps in the laboratory framework are the following:

1. Gap Analysis. A comprehensive gap analysis and recommendations has been presented in the

gap analysis report of the EPA restructuring project (2017) and also briefly described in the

earlier chapters of this report (a summary table is presented in annex 1). A complete inventory

of the current status of the laboratory equipment has been carried out (Annex 2).

2. Staffing plan needs to be based on the Gap Analysis and TORs/job descriptions for positions

prepared and the job descriptions of the laboratory manager; quality manager and other senior

staff shall be included in the quality manual. The laboratory management and key experts

needs to be hired whenever necessary. The staffing situation shall be reviewed and the plan

finalized during the consultancy of the international laboratory specialist (see also below re

training needs assessment).

3. It is proposed to carry out the EMIN process1 (through a set of stakeholder workshops

facilitated by an international specialist) in order to develop environmental indicators and to

prepare proper environmental monitoring programmes (see monitoring section of this report

page x).

4. An acquisition plan for the central laboratory and regional laboratories shall be done based

on results of inventory (see Annex 2) and future needs.

1 Environmental Monitoring and Indicators Network: See Section _ for further details



5. At the same time with above, a decision on establishing EMC and related legal provisions

shall be processed; the above mentioned staffing and acquisition plans shall include the

programmatic multi-year resource allocation for the entire EMC.

6. Laboratory certification process shall be carried out and quality management

practices established in the laboratories.

7. The key piece of quality documentation is the quality manual. This is the document which

describes in detail the policy on quality and the quality management structure and describes or

refers to the procedures which constitute the working quality system. The quality manual is,

typically, prepared and checked by laboratory management, usually under the overall co-

ordination of the quality manager. It should, however, be formally authorised for issuing from

as high a point in the management hierarchy as possible; chief executive, director general,

chairman are typical points. This ensures that the manual has the strongest authority and also

shows, to the accreditation body, a commitment on the part of the senior management to the

quality system. It is critical that the quality manual is seen to be a working document. It

should be available to all staff and they must be instructed to read it and to use it to guide them

in all aspects of their work. It will then be a vital force for the consistent and comprehensive

operation of the quality system2.

Laboratories will normally require documentation of technical procedures in addition to the

quality manual. The key part of the technical procedural documentation will be the

documentation of the test or calibration methods themselves (Standard Operating Procedures -

see Chapter 2 for SOPs prepared so far). The level of detail for these methods documents

should be such as to enable a trained practitioner to carry out tests and calibrations in a proper

and consistent fashion.

8. Training Needs Assessment. Currently training is needed for all staff of the laboratories,

including management, key experts and other staff ̧a detailed training plan shall be prepared

and training carried out by an international laboratory specialist whose qualification includes

degree in chemistry and experience in laboratory works as per international guidelines, and

who masters advanced laboratory equipment (GC, AAS, HPLC) and has been professionally

trained according to ISO 17025 requirements. Training will include management and quality

aspects and certification issues, as well as practical training on laboratory analysis as per

SOPs as well as sampling, reporting and statistical analysis.

PROCEDURES AND OUTPUTS/RESULTS OF ESTABLISHMENT OF WELL MANAGED

ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORY/EMC

Capacity and procedures needed to establish a well-managed Environmental Laboratory/

Environmental Monitoring Centre and develop it will include:

1. Create and maintain capacities of the future EMC central laboratory (current EPA lab in

Lahore) to analyse all parameters related to Environmental Quality Standards (EQS’s) of

Punjab.

2. Create and maintain capacities of the EMC central laboratory to analyse all parameters

expressed in MEAs signed by Pakistan, including heavy metals and POPs (Persistent Organic

Pollutants).

2 Source: Complying with ISO 17025 – A practical guidebook.



3. Create a network of good quality regional laboratories (7-8) to perform a basic set of

environmental analysis, limited to about 35 parameters, in each laboratory or as required by

the typical pollution profile of regional industries.

4. Act as a reference laboratory (testing and calibration) to regional laboratories and private

laboratories to enhance their level of performance.

5. To create capacity for the EMC central lab to assess the quality and enhance the quality

control mechanisms of regional laboratories for periodic controls by own management and

third party controllers.

6. Establish a procedure to certify private environmental laboratories, environmental

consultancy companies and individual sample takers, to keep record on certifications and

keep the record updated and publicly available.

7. Establish a Laboratory Quality Management Committee to strive for and ensure a continuous

development of quality in all laboratories of Punjab

8. Create and maintain Standard Operating Procedures (SOP’s) for sample taking, site

inspections and laboratory analysis for each environmental parameter analyzed in EMC

central laboratory and regional laboratories.

9. Take into use a Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS) to keep record on

particulars, treatment and fate of each individual sample and operations in the laboratory.

10. Establish a mechanism to report analysis results in standard format, perform basic statistical

analysis and record results to central database and to report to customer and to the EMIS-

database.

11. Establish a separate development project for the central laboratory to attain ISO 17025

laboratory certificate, maintain it with quality control system, including periodic management

reviews and external reviews.

Other related activities that will support the good management of environmental laboratories:

1. Strengthening Environmental Assessments and Environmental Regulatory Framework in

Punjab (SEA-ERF)

2. Development of Cost-effective Environmental Monitoring through EMIN-process and

Capacity Development (EMIN-programme)

3. Establishment of Punjab Environmental Institute (EPI-programme)

4. Establishment of Punjab Environmental Technology Institute (IETT-programme)

5. Cooperation with related organizations such as Pakistan Space and Upper Atmosphere

Research Commission and their laboratory and monitoring activities, as well as Punjab

Saaf Pani Company and their monitoring of drinking water quality and quantity.

As a result of the activities above, it is expected that:

1. The EMC central laboratory will be equipped to take samples and do measurements of

wide variety of parameters, including air, water, waste water and soil analysis according

to international standards.

2. The EMC central laboratory has reached ISO 17025:2005 certification.

3. EMC regional laboratories are equipped and capacitated to take samples by certified

sample takers and reached ability to analyze and measure basic 35 parameters, including

air, water, waste water and soil analysis according to international standards and SOP’s.

4. All EMC laboratories are using Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS) for

numbering and keeping track of each individual sample from a sampling bottle to the

analysis report as well as recording of all requirements set in ISO 17025:2005 –standard.



5. The field staff has got training and got certified on the following fields of sampling:

drinking water and general water sampling, waste water sampling, air quality

sampling/measurements, hydrological measurements, noise measurements, sampling of

soils and solid waste.

6. EMC has established certification schemes for private laboratories, individual laboratory

analyses, individual sample takers on the above mentioned sampling types and

environmental consultancy companies and provides training and certification services to

private environmental consultancy companies and laboratories.

7. EMC laboratories are recording the results of all measurements, with location data, to

Environmental Monitoring Information System (EMIS).

CAPACITY BUILDING AND PRELIMINARY NEEDS ANALYSIS

Personnel

Together with the establishment of a well-managed EPA environmental laboratory network/EMC, an

extensive capacity building program shall be designed and implemented. Basic principle will be to

train all key experts for compliance with ISO 17025:2005, the LIMS and training of trainers programs

and certification schemes. The focus shall be in creating local capacities to do the trainings in future

and to further develop their palette of analysis, widening of certification schemes to take into account

of trend to take into use automatic measuring stations, field measurements, IT-data transfers and

related technologies to gradually replace part of the “sampling to analysis” –procedures, including an

extensive and programmatic trainings on sampling, analysis, measurements, site inspections and

LIMS as well as on recording of data, reporting, handling and storing of hazardous chemicals to fulfil

requirements of ISO 17025 and relevant international sampling standards.

As mentioned earlier, it is proposed to hire an international expert to train key staff and send some key

experts to be trained as trainers and future “owners” of local sampling certification scheme to be

established. International experts will be also assigned to assist EMC in drafting the certification

schemes and training of trainers according to them (to perform according to SOP’s of sampling

methods, inspections, analysis).

Special attention will be paid for procurement procedures and competence of procurement officials.

Preliminary needs analysis for laboratory design EMC central water laboratory

A preliminary draft plan of the needed instruments for water laboratory is presented below.

The structure and capacity of the suggested laboratory should be further discussed and developed as

the monitoring requirements (what indicators and parameters are monitored and in which distances

from Lahore) become clear through EMIN-process and selection of Provincial Core Set of

Environmental Indicators (PCEI).

The function of the laboratory would be: Water laboratory primarily supporting the monitoring of the

water quality in Punjab (ambient environment monitoring). For some parameters requiring more

sophisticated instruments, the EMC laboratory could also service needs of regions.

The proposed duties and functions of the laboratory would relate to monitoring (sampling, measuring,

analysing) the water quality, including sediment.

Some general instruments supporting the laboratory:



Water purification system (depending on the level of the equipment, eg. central vs. local, limited vs.

limitless volume of water as well as the level of purity)

Laboratory fume hood(s),

Laboratory oven (for drying laboratory glassware),

Balance(s)

Desiccator

Glassware

Sample bottles

Pipettes

Solvent dispensers

Water and sediment samplers

Nutrient analysis

CFA equipment,

Spectrophotometer,

Autoclave,

Helium gas

Basic measurements (pH, conductivity, alkalinity, dissolved oxygen, chemical oxygen demand):

Titration apparatus (multifunctional),

Water bath

TOC and TIC:

Carbon analyzer,

Synthetic air

Anions:

Ion chromatography system,

Nitrogen gas

Trace element analysis:

ICP-OES, matrix elements and elements in environmental samples,

Argon gas and additional gases depending on instrument

metal-free laboratory fume hood,

preferably a metal-free laminar flow cabinet, (if not possible, also normal fume hood)

freeze dryer (lyophilizer)

sieving equipment (for soils, sediments etc.)

milling equipment (e.g. planetary ball mill),

Direct Hg analysis (solid samples):

Hg-analyzer

Oxygen gas

PCB and organochlorine pesticide analysis (suitable for some other organic analysis as well):

GC-MS instrument (single quadrupole), with diffusion vacuum pump,

helium gas (or other gas depending on instrument)

laboratory chamber furnace,



solvent dispenser

water samples: magnetic stirrer

soil and biota samples: ultrasonicator,

solvent evaporator: rotavapor+vacuum pump,

centrifuge,

Biological analysis (phytoplankton, periphyton, (benthic fauna):

inverted microscope(s) for phytoplankton analysis

study and stereo microscopes for benthic fauna

study microscopes for diatoms

microcope cameras and imaging programmes

sedimenting chambers for phytoplankton

Phytoplankton nets

Additionally, the sampling devices, including a boat.

The laboratory should aim for the international accreditation for ISO 17025 (General requirements for

the competence of testing and calibration laboratories). The equipment listed above but not present in

the inventory (Annex 1) of the current Environmental Laboratories would constitute a list that would

serve as basis for acquisition plan to be drafted by the EMC according to the procedure presented in

the Fig 1.1.

Section 2 of Chapter 1 Certification of environmental laboratories


Section 2

Certification of Environmental

Laboratories



Section 2

Certification of Environmental Laboratories CERTIFICATION CRITERIA

Section 6(1) (k) of PEPA 1997 amended 2012 states that EPA is required to;

“Certify one or more laboratories as approved laboratories for conducting tests and analysis and one

or more research institutes as environmental research institutes for conducting research and

investigation, for the purposes of this Act.”

Subject to regulation 5 of the Lab Certification Rules, 2000 the criteria for a laboratory to be certified

as an environmental lab is as follows:

1) The laboratory is located in a clean area and not adjacent to an open sewerage drain or factory

from which emissions of air pollutants or discharge of effluents or wastes may interfere with,

contaminate or otherwise adversely affect the reliability of its tests and analyses;

2) The building in which the laboratory is housed is suitable in size, design and quality of

construction, for use as an environmental laboratory;

3) The laboratory has qualified and experienced scientific and technical staff and appropriate

analytical equipment and apparatus as specified in Schedules III and IV (of the Lab

Certification Rules, 2000) respectively;

4) The laboratory has deposited with the Federal Agency the scrutiny fee and certification fee at

the rates specified in Schedule II;

5) The laboratory has installed a comprehensive scientific system of reporting test results,

supported by data handling facilities; and

6) The laboratory has proper waste disposal arrangements.

Furthermore, the Rules also state that a laboratory may be certified as an environmental laboratory for

testing of water, liquid effluents, wastes, soil, gaseous emissions, noise or a combination of these for

specific Environmental Quality Standards parameters, in which case the requirements of analytical

equipment and apparatus specified in Schedule IV, scientific and technical staff specified in Schedule

III of the same Rules have to be evaluated accordingly.

PROCESS FLOW

The future state organisational structure enables the Environment Protection and Climate Change

Department (EP&CCD) to register and certify environmental laboratories and consultants. The

following process flow (Fig 1.2) involving the flow of information and task delegation, has been

proposed for the ease of the staff carrying out Lab inspections and certifications. The flow has been

designed keeping in view the bottlenecks identified in the previous system and aims to provide timely

execution of the task.



Fig 1.2: Process Flow for the Certification of Environmental Laboratories

Major steps of the process flow:

1) Registration of the Laboratory: A general registration would be carried out to get basic data

of all the laboratories using the system to get their labs certified.

2) Submission of Application and Scrutiny Fee: The Laboratories would either apply for

Renewal of their past certification or submit a new application for Certification. Step by step

detail would be provided by the applicant with regards to their facility, establishment, staff,

equipment, certifications, experience, SOPs etc. in order for Environment Protection and

Climate Change Department (EP&CCD) to evaluate them thoroughly and provide an

informed decision.

3) Completeness: After the scrutiny of fee and the filed application for all the information

provided the person in charge (Deputy Director) would deem the application complete forn

the evaluation to start.

4) Lab Inspection Report: An inspector or team, as deemed necessary, would be deputed in the

field to inspect the premises of the applying laboratory and check consistency as well as

verify the information provided. The verification would be done through an android

application and the inspector would assign scores to each item (already built in the system)

for ease of evaluation by experts back in the headquarters.

5) The evaluation from Deputy Director and the field staff (in LIR) would be passed along to the

committee of experts for their evaluation and comments.



6) The final Decision would lie with the Director countersigned and approved by the Director

General. The lab would either be certified or it would be asked to revise and improve the

flaws and resubmit the application again after improvements.

SOPS FOR INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

Registration Application of Environmental Laboratories

Field Description

*If user is the contact pull sign up info here else enter contact details

Full Name: Enter contact person name

Email: Enter contact person email

CNIC: Enter CNIC

CNIC Front side picture: Select file option: upload image

CNIC back side picture: Select file option: upload image

Address: Enter contact person’s address

Phone: Enter contact person’s phone number

Application for: New Certification,

Renewal of certification,

Issue of duplicate Certificate.

(scrutiny fee to be added to fee of the above)

Renewal Application of Environmental Laboratories

Field Description

Tracking ID of previous registration

Certificate (previous) (Attachment)

Date of initial registration Date

Date of issue of Certification Date

Fee payment History Attachment of bills

Registration renewal History

Performance evaluation History Attachment (Annual reports summary)

Cancellation or suspension History

* Plus the ensuing information in the following forms

Certification Application of Environmental Laboratories

Field Description

A - General Information

Name of Laboratory Enter laboratory’s name

Address Enter laboratory’s address

Phone: Enter laboratory’s telephone number

Fax: Enter laboratory’s fax number

Email: Enter laboratory’s email ID

Type of Laboratory:

Government, Public Sector, Semi-autonomous

body, Autonomous body, Private Sector, Other

(specify)

Mandate/Purpose of lab: Research and Development, Quality Assurance,

Quality Control, Other (specify)



Year of Establishment: Year the laboratory was established

Area of Laboratory:

Area in Marlas, Kanals

Attach copy of approved building plan and

equipment layout plan

Has the Laboratory been certified by any other

authority?

Yes, No,

if yes then specify (ISO, PNAC, other)

B - Staff Information (*plus tab; add one by one)

Sr. No.

Name: Enter person’s name

Designation:

Position held in the laboratory

Options: (Chief Analyst, Analyst, Assistant Analyst, support

staff, Other)

Degree/ Qualification:

Highest degree:

Options: (PhD, MS/MPhil/MSc, BSc, FSc, Other)

Major:

Options: (Chemistry, Analytical Chemistry, Physical chemistry,

Organic chemistry, Inorganic chemistry, Other)

Experience in analytical lab work Number of years of relevant experience:

Options: (1 year, 3 years, 5years, 7years, Other)

Experience in Area Testing of: Ambient air, water, noise, wastewater, soil, stack

emissions (check boxes)

C - Equipment Information

Analytical Instruments for Liquid Effluents/Wastes

(Add list from LIR)

Options to fill: (*plus tab; add one by one)

Make, Model, Year of manufacture,

Functional/Nonfunctional, Number present

Analytical Instruments for Gaseous Emissions

(Add list from LIR)




Analytical Instruments for Noise

(Add list from LIR)




Back-up equipment and apparatus

Yes, No

If yes, please specify: ___________

(*plus tab; add one by one)

Mobile Lab

Calibration Mechanism (attach plan if any) Field for description and attachment option

List of significant additional analytical equipment

and apparatus not mentioned previously:

(enter details of functional equipment only)

Name of equipment/apparatus, Make, Model,

Year of manufacture


Which of the National Environmental Quality

Standards parameters can be measured using wet

analysis methods?


Instrumental and any services agreement for repair

and maintenance of workshop for

equipment/apparatus.

Yes, No

If yes, please specify: ___________


D - Chemicals

Whether analytical grade chemicals are available in 6 months



store for: 12 months

2 years

What is source for supply of chemicals: Local purchase

Direct purchase

Chemical stock


Name, Year of purchase, Year of expiry,

Amount present

E - Standard Operating Procedures

Sampling

Parameter: ___________________

Reference Method: _____________


Water and Wastewater

Parameter: ___________________



Air (Ambient and Stack)

Parameter: ___________________



Noise

Parameter: ___________________



Health and Safety

Parameter: ___________________



QA/QC Attachment

F – Reporting System

Does the laboratory have computerized data handling

facilities? Yes, No

Are there other facilities available in the laboratory? Yes, No

If Yes, please specify: ______________

Whether adequate facilities for collection and storage

of samples are available: Yes, No

Whether waste handling procedures and facilities for

waste disposals are available: Yes, No

G – Experience

When did the following activities start?

analytical work: _____________________

environment related work: ____________

Total years/months: ____________

List some significant environment-related analytical

work and research studies carried out, indicating the

sponsors and beneficiaries:

(in case of application for renewal, attach copy of

annual report of activities)

_________________________


Does the laboratory provide training in environment

related laboratory techniques?

Yes, No,

If yes please specify: ______________

Total current annual budget: Rs. _______________________

List revenue generated from environment-related

analytical work during the last five years. __________________________



Certifications:

Options:

ISO/IEC: (Fill ref number)

PNAC

Punjab EPA

Federal EPA

Other: ________________________

Note: Every Data Field mentioned above would be pulled into respective field in the LIR for

the inspector to verify.



Lab Inspection Report

Note: The LIR form would be automated (android based) for Inspectors and Experts to fill.

Staff

REQUIREMENTS ASSESSMENT

Degree Experience Number

required Qualification

Number

Present

Meeting

Requirement Score

Chief Analyst

Ph. D., M.Phil or M. Sc

(Analytical Chemistry

preferably Physical/

Organic/ Inorganic

Chemistry)

For Ph.D. 3 years for M.Phil. 5 years and

for M.Sc 7 years in analytical laboratory

work testing of air/ water pollutants, noise,

effluents or wastes preferably with regard

to the National Environmental Quality

Standards parameters.

One

1=Yes

2=No

Comments:

/100

Analyst

M.Sc. or M.Phil.

(Analytical Chemistry

preferably Physical/

Organic/Inorganic

Chemistry).

For M.Phil. 1 year and for M.Sc. 3 years in

analytical laboratory work preferably in

analysis of effluents or wastes

Two

1=Yes

2=No

Comments:

/50

Deputy/Assistant

Analyst

B.Sc (with chemistry as

one of the major subject).

5 years and 3 years for Deputy Analyst and

Assistant Analyst, respectively, in

analytical laboratory work preferably with

regard to the National

Environmental Quality Standards

parameters testing

Three

1=Yes

2=No

Comments:

/30

Lab support staff F. Sc (with chemistry as

one of the major subject). 1 year in analytical laboratory work. Three

1=Yes

2=No

Comments:

/20

Staff Evaluation Total score: /200



Equipment


Requirement Available Operational Number

Present Meeting Requirement Score

Analytical

Instruments for

Liquid

Effluents/Wastes

Spectrophotometer 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

/60

(Any one of

four present)

Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

High Performance Liquid Chromatograph 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Gas Chromatograph 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Conductivity Meter 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

/150

pH Meter 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Analytical Balances 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

BOD determination apparatus 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Liquid Effluent Samplers 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Thermometer/ Temperature measuring

devices

1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Incubator (minimum range 15-40C 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Furnace 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Ovens 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Refrigerators 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

A-grade volumetric glass apparatus 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Analytical

Instruments for

Gaseous

Air/Dust Samplers 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /100

Analyzer (continuous monitoring and 1=Yes 1= Functional 1=Yes 2=No



Emissions portable) for measuring SOx, NOx, CO, HF

and HS 2=No 2= Non-Functional ______________________

Smoke Analyzer or Ringlemann Scale 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Emission Analyzer 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Analytical

Instruments for

Noise

Sound Level Meter with equivalent noise

level measuring facilities

1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /100

Noise Frequency Analyzer 1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Back-up

equipment and

apparatus

Adequate stocks in store 1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

/30 Calibration

Arrangements for regular calibration and

checks for proper maintenance of record

pertaining thereto

1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Chemicals Adequate stocks and store and assured

regular source of supply

1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________

Mobile

Laboratory

Fully equipped mobile van for sampling and

testing

1=Yes

2=No

1= Functional

2= Non-Functional

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /30

Test Reporting

System

Comprehensive and scientific system of

reporting test results supported by data

handling facilities

1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /30

Experience Relevant experience of environmental

sampling and testing

1=Yes

2=No Years: ___

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /100

Equipment Evaluation Total score: /600

Standard

Operating

Procedures


Available/

In-place Standard Reference method Parameters

Number

Present Meeting Requirement Score

Sampling 1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /20

Water and

wastewater

1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /20

Air (Ambient and 1=Yes 1=Yes 2=No /20



Stack) 2=No ______________________

Noise 1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /10

Health and Safety 1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /10

QA/QC 1=Yes

2=No

1=Yes 2=No

______________________ /20

SOPs Evaluation Total score: /100

Certifications


Certified Category

(eg. Testing & Calibration) Date of issuance Date of expiry Score

Punjab EPA 1=Yes

2=No

/20

Federal EPA 1=Yes

2=No

PNAC 1=Yes

2=No /30

ISO/IEC 1=Yes

2=No /30

Any Other:

________________

1=Yes

2=No

/20 Any Other:

________________

1=Yes

2=No

Evaluation Total score: /100



Evaluation

ASSESSMENT

Score

(Assigned in LIR) Score Comments

Staff

Equipment

Standard Operating Procedures

Certifications

Expert Judgement

(Based on relevant experience of

environmental sampling and

testing)

Total Score /1000 /1000

Section 3

Quality Assurance / Quality Control

System

Section 3 of Chapter 1 Quality Assurance / Quality Control System

Section 3

QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY

CONTROL SYSTEM A QA/QC manual is designed to identify policies, organization, objectives, functional activities, and

Quality Assurance/Quality Control activities aimed at achieving quality goals desired for operation of

a laboratory. The manual is also intended to give confidence to users of the lab's reports by indicating

specific methods and procedures by which the lab achieves its quality objectives.

The QA/QC manual documents how the lab ensures the quality of results reported by the lab. QA is

important during sampling, preservation and transport of samples to the lab, while samples are being

analysed as well as when data is reported.

The QA/QC manual is primarily intended for use by laboratory personnel to ensure reliability of

results. It is also used by personnel outside the lab to gain insight and confidence in the overall QA

measures used by the lab. The manual must be readily available to analysts and lab personnel.

The main features and content of a QA/QC manual (Box 1), which also complies with ISO 17025,

includes the following:

1) Quality policy statement and accreditation: This should be made on the authority of the

most senior management body for the laboratory. This must be at the level where decisions on

resource allocation are made. It should contain a commitment to quality, to good professional

practice and to a quality management system based on ISO 17025. It should also contain a

commitment to provide resources to support this level of quality.

2) Organization and Management: This section should show the internal organisation of the

laboratory and the relationship between the laboratory and any organisation of which it is a

part. It should include organisational charts to show that the quality manager has access to the

highest level of management and to the laboratory manager. Each level of staff should be

described, with an outline of the level of experience and qualifications required to fill each

grade. The object of this is to set a minimum acceptable level of expertise at each level which

the laboratory undertakes to maintain, but the description should allow sufficient flexibility to

admit staff with specialised but narrow capabilities, where required.

3) Job descriptions: This section should contain full job descriptions of key staff. This must

include the laboratory manager and the quality manager and their deputies. It should make

clear what the responsibilities of each post are and what functions each performs. Any other

key posts should also be included.

4) Approved signatories: This section must define precisely, either by name, seniority or post,

the individuals who are authorized to take responsibility for the laboratory's data. Only these

individuals may authorize the release of work and sign test/calibration certificates.

5) Acceptance of work: This section should make clear exactly who may accept work and

commit the laboratory to a delivery date. It should state that the person accepting the work is

under an obligation to ensure that the laboratory has the equipment and expertise to do the

work and that they must not enter into a commitment unless they can be certain on this point.

The formal contract review process can be described here.

6) Quality documentation: The structure of the quality documentation should be defined. This

will normally be a hierarchy, headed by the quality manual, which refers to the methods

manual or equivalent technical and other procedural documentation. Reference should be


made to the subsidiary records and documentation such as the equipment logs and the staff

records. The purpose of each piece of documentation must also be defined as well as the

person responsible for maintaining it and authorizing it to be issued.

7) Document control: The controlled document system should be described and the

responsibility and authority of the quality manager in this respect defined.

8) Scope of tests/calibrations: This should state the laboratory's policy to use internationally

recognized methods wherever possible, supplemented by fully validated and documented in-

house methods. This section should also include or refer to a list of typical sources for

methods appropriate to the laboratory's scope of activities.

9) Test/calibration methods: There should be a description of the procedure for introducing a

new method. This will generally involve the laboratory manager in arranging to validate and

document the method. The quality manager should approve the validation and documentation

before the laboratory manager releases the method.

10) Equipment and reference standards: This section should list the major items of equipment

which the laboratory operates and the reference standards held. This can be expressed in

general terms and reference made to the equipment logs as a full inventory. The format and

operation of the equipment logs should be described and the procedure for checking and

accepting a new piece of equipment into service, as well as the procedure for the withdrawal

of equipment.

11) Calibration policy: There should be a statement of the policy of the laboratory to achieve

traceability of all measurements by the use of traceable (to SI units where relevant) standards

of measurement and certified reference materials. Where this is not achievable there should

be a commitment to inter-laboratory calibration exercises and similar measurement audits.

12) Calibration and maintenance of instruments: There should be a general statement of the

policy to calibrate at intervals such that the integrity of measurements is not set at risk. The

preferred procedure for determining calibration intervals should be stated. Reference should

be made to the procedural documents which describe instrument calibrations. A general

responsibility should be placed on all staff to ensure that any instrument or piece of

equipment which they suspect is out of calibration is not used until checked. The equipment

must be clearly labelled as suspect and not to be used. The problem should be brought to the

attention of the laboratory manager.

13) Methods and uncertainty of measurement: This section should describe the laboratory's

policy and procedures on the determination of method performance validation and on

assessing uncertainty of measurement. There should be a description of procedures to be used

at initial validation of methods and a description of the responsibility of the laboratory

manager for updating the information on the basis of QC data.

14) Quality control: There should be a general statement on which level of staff or individuals

are permitted to judge whether results meet quality control criteria. Reference should be made

to the fact that methods documentation includes details of the quality control data to be

collected and the criteria to be applied.

15) Procedure when data is suspect: The procedure to be followed when a suspicion that faulty

data has been released should be described. This will normally require investigation by the

laboratory manager and quality manager and probably an audit. Corrective action would also

normally be required.

16) Handling of samples and administration of work: This section should have a complete

description of the laboratory's procedures for receiving, storing and recording samples,

sample numbering and labelling, allocation of work, recording of results, quality checking of

results, preparation of reports and issuing reports.


17) Recording of results: This section should describe the use of worksheets and/or notebooks.

Instructions on the use of ink and the way of making corrections should be given.

18) Disposal of samples and other waste: The laboratory's policy on the length of time samples

are kept should be stated, as should the policy on disposal, with a commitment to the

responsible disposal of toxic materials.

19) Records: The laboratory policy on the retention of records should be stated and the procedure

to be followed in disposal of records must be given. This should define who may authorize

disposal and require that an inventory be kept of the records disposed of. The policy on

security of records, including computer data, must be stated, and the person responsible for

archiving and computer back-up identified.

20) Reporting of results: The minimum requirement for the contents of a report should be given

21) Quality incidents, complaints and control of non-conforming work: The laboratory's

policy to treat complaints positively and as a source of useful information should be stated.

The persons authorised to deal with complaints should be identified and the procedure for

recording complaints and following them up defined, including the requirement for corrective

action.

22) Confidentiality: The laboratory's policy to retain confidentiality should be stated.

Instructions must be included that all staff must take all reasonable precautions to keep

clients’ data and other information confidential. The requirement to ensure that no such

information is left out in the laboratory overnight or in an unattended room should be stated.

23) Staff appointment, training and review: The operation of the staff records must be

described including their use for recording new staff and changes in the training or status of

existing staff. The mechanism for selecting staff for training, carrying out the training and

assessing competence and for issuing authorisations to carry out tests, calibrations and other

procedures should be described.

24) Procedures for audit and review of the quality system: All of the procedures for the audit

and review of the quality system should be described together with the records to be kept, and

the policy on frequency of audits and review included.

25) Corrective action: The procedure for agreeing and recording corrective action should be

described, as well as a description of the procedure for follow-up to ensure corrective action

is complete and has been effective.

26) Preventive action and improvement: The procedures for identifying preventive action and

quality improvement opportunities should be described, and the responsibility for evaluating

suggestions and carrying out the preventive action assigned.

27) Premises and environment: The laboratory premises should be described and, ideally, a plan

included. This section should also draw attention to any parts of the premises to which access

is restricted and who is authorized to grant access, and should describe any areas subject to

special environmental controls as well as the mechanism for monitoring, recording and

maintaining such control.

28) Security of premises: This section should describe the arrangements for the security of the

premises during and outside working hours, identify the persons authorized to hold keys,

describe the procedure for granting authorization, and identify the person with overall

responsibility for security.



Box 1: Typical content of a Quality Manual complying with ISO

17025

1. Quality policy statement and accreditation

2. Organization and Management

3. Job descriptions

4. Approved signatories

5. Acceptance of work

6. Quality documentation

7. Document control

8. Scope of tests/calibrations

9. Test/calibration methods

10. Equipment and reference standards

11. Calibration policy

12. Calibration and maintenance of instruments

13. Methods and uncertainty of measurement

14. Quality control

15. Procedure when data is suspect

16. Handling of samples and administration of work

17. Recording of results

18. Disposal of samples and other waste

19. Records

20. Reporting of results

21. Quality incidents, complaints and control of non-conforming work

22. Confidentiality

23. Staff appointment, training and review

24. Procedures for audit and review of the quality system

25. Corrective action

26. Preventive action and improvement

27. Premises and environment

28. Security of premises

29. Appendices, such as A list of the scope of accreditation held or

applied for; A list of holders of the quality manual; A list of all

controlled documents and subsidiary documentation together with

their scope of issue or storage locations; Examples of pro-formats for

recording quality issues such as audits, corrective and preventive action

and client complaints; and An example of the laboratory’s proposed

report format.

Section 4

Accreditation

Section 4 of Chapter 1 Accreditation


Section 4

ACCREDITATION Accreditation involves thorough evaluation of a facility’s, in this case environmental Laboratory’s,

capacities, expertise and technological capabilities. To acquire accreditation as an environmental lab,

it should provide sufficient details and evidence regarding;

Lab's quality system

Staff

Facilities and equipment

Test methods and SOPs

Records and reports;

in order to indicate that the lab has the capability to provide accurate and defensible data.

REQUIREMENTS

To become accredited, EMC lab must:

i. Submit a complete application and pay the appropriate fee.

ii. Submit an acceptable QA manual.

iii. Submit documentation of initial QC procedures required by the methods.

iv. Successfully analyse required PT samples.

v. Pass an on-site audit by Ecology or another recognized accrediting authority.

CONTINUING ACCREDITATION

To retain accreditation, EMC lab must:

i. Submit results of PT sample analyses.

ii. Make required improvements in its QA program.

iii. Report significant changes in facility, equipment, personnel, or QA/QC procedures.

iv. Submit a renewal application and pay annual fees.

v. Submit to required audits and implement any required corrective actions.

EMC must get accreditation from Pakistan National Accreditation Council, Islamabad, in order to be

certified as a quality reference environmental laboratory. The main SOP of the PNAC accreditation

procedure is given below:

Accreditation Application by PNAC

Organization

(Address of laboratory)

Postcode

Tel:

Fax:

Person to whom enquiries about this application should be directed

Name of Contact:

Designation:

Address:



Postcode

Tel:

Fax:

E-mail:

This application is for (tick appropriate boxes)

New accreditation as a calibration laboratory

New accreditation as a testing laboratory

Extension of scope; complete Part 3 (calibration) or Part 4 (testing)

Permanent lab Mobile lab

For new accreditation only: I enclosed (tick boxes)

A copy of the laboratory's Quality Manual

A copy of the laboratory's Quality Procedures

A copy of the laboratory's Technical Procedures

List of laboratory's staff

Applicant fee-see note below

Part 1 - About yourselves Please type or use BLOCK LETTERS

1.1 Name and position (Director level) of person authorising this application

Title Name

Name

Position

1.2 Name and address of parent organisation (if different from laboratory address on

page1)

Organisation

Address

Postcode

Tel: Fax:

1.3 Address for invoicing (if different from laboratory address on page 1)

Organisation



Address

Postcode

Tel: Fax:

1.4 Information about ownership: please tick the appropriate box.

Owned by an individual Owned by public limited Company

Owned by a private company/partnership Part of learned/tech institution

Owned by a public body/nationalised industry Part of an academic institution

Other: Please describe __________________________________________________________

1.5 Is calibration/testing the main activity of the parent company

Yes No: describe the main activities of the parent company

_____________________________________________________________________________

1.6. For whom does the laboratory undertake calibration/testing

Own organisation Other organisations

Part 2 - About your staff Please type or use BLOCK LETTERS

2.1 Please list the names, technical qualifications and relevant experience of the following

staff

A. Technical Management (if more than three members please attach extra sheet)

Name

Qualifications

Relevant

Experience

Name

Qualifications

Relevant

Experience

Name

Qualifications

Relevant

Experience



B. Quality Manager

Name

Qualifications

Relevant

Experience

Part 3 - Scope of application: calibration

List all the measurement parameters for which you seek accreditation. Use a photocopy of this

page for each field of measurement.

Field of measurement:

Measured quantity Range

Calibration & Measurement

Capability (CMC)

expressed as an uncertainty

( + )

Brief description of

measurement and

equipment used

*capabilities are to be expressed as uncertainties (±) for a confidence probability of not less than 95%

Part 4 - Scope of application: testing

4A. As far as is possible, quote standard specifications in the third column. These may include

specifications issued by companies and other organisations, both Pakistan and foreign, as well as

national and international standards. Give reference numbers and dates of specifications quoted.

In the absence of standard specifications, documented in-house procedures may be quoted: cross-refer

to your laboratory's Quality Manual/Procedures Manual.

(Use of photocopy of this page, if the space given is found insufficient)



Materials/Products

tested*

Types of

test/

Properties

measured

Range of

measurement

Minimum

detection

limit

Uncertainty of

Measurement

(where

applicable)

( + )

Standard

specification/

Techniques/

equipment

used

*Please also mention Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient (API) in case of Pharmaceutical Testing

4C List the major items of equipment currently used for the types of test listed in part 4

(Use of photocopy of this page, if the space given is found insufficient)

Description (include make and

model)

Working Range/ capacity of

equipment and other relevant

information

Minimum detection

limit

Part 5 - About your quality system

Please answer every question, adding comments as necessary

A. Organisation & Management

Yes No Quality Manual reference/other

comment

1. Is a copy of the Quality Manual supplied

with this application?

If "No" give reason

2. Are policy and procedures for the

operation of the laboratory identified in the

Quality Manual ?

3. Are there documented procedures for

control of changes to Quality System

Documentation?

4. Does the Quality Manual contain charts

showing

The organisation structure within the

laboratory?

The relationship to any parent

organisation?



Availability of resources to carry out the

task?

5. Has the Quality Manger the

responsibility and authority to

identify quality problems and initiate

effective solutions?

6. Can your lab be held legally responsible?

7. Does your manual refer to the availability

of financial resources to carry out the

task?

B. Quality audit and review


comment

1. Are there documented quality

procedures for auditing all laboratory

systems?

2. How frequently are quality audits held?

3. Are records of quality audits

maintained?

4. Is the laboratory's quality system

reviewed at regular intervals?

5. How frequently are reviews of the

quality system carried out?

C. Laboratory staff


comment

1. Does the Quality System contain

provisions for the supervision of

unqualified staff?

2. Have appropriate standards of

professional ability, qualifications and

experience been prescribed for

technical/managerial posts?

3. Are documented training

arrangements and records available?

D. Equipment and calibration


comment

1. Does a fully documented calibration

program exist to ensure that the accuracy of

equipment is adequate for the service



operated by the laboratory?

2. Is a record maintained for test equipment,

including calibration results?

3. Are adequate facilities and environments

provided for calibration, handling, control,

storage and maintenance of all testing &

measuring equipment?

4. Are there documented procedures for

calibrating all equipment and reference

standards which cover the method of

calibration and maximum, intervals between

calibrations?

5. Are the internal laboratory reference

standards, and the calibration of key testing

equipment traceable to national standard

through:

PNAC accredited

Other bodies (specify)?

E. Procedures

Yes No

Quality Manual reference/other

comment

1. Are all methods and procedures for

calibration and testing fully documented?

2. Does the laboratory use any non-standard

methods (e.g documented in-house

methods)?

3. Are the documents referred to above

available to all concerned?

F. Accommodation & environment


comment

1. Are the environmental conditions in

which calibration/tests are undertaken

suitable for the accuracy of the

determinations made?

2. Is there control of access to work areas?

G. Handling and storage


comment

1. Are work and inspection instructions

documented and implemented for the



handling, storage and disposal of materials

and samples?

2. Is provision made to prevent deterioration

or damage to materials or samples, both

before and after tests?

3. Are storage methods prescribed,

including special environments?

4. Are there prescribed procedures for the

inspection of samples in storage?

5. Are such stores accessible only to

authorised persons?

H. Records

Yes No


comment

1. Is there a prescribed system of recording

calibration/test results?

2. Are original observations and

calculations recorded and stored?

3. Are there arrangements for ensuring the

accuracy, completeness and confidentiality

of all records?

4. For what period does the laboratory

retain the original recorded observations

and derived data?

J. Calibration/test reports


comment

1. Do you have a list of authorised

signatories, by name or by position ?

2. Do calibration/test reports contain all the

information required by ISO 17025, para

5.10?

K. Complaints and anomalies

Yes No


comment

1. Do you have a documented procedure for

handling complaints/anomalies?

2. Do you keep records of

complaints/anomalies and actions taken?

L. Sub-contracting




comment

1. Do you sub-contract calibrations or

tests_______

2. Do you have a documented policy on

sub-contracting?

3. Do you have a register of all sub-

contractors used and a record of sub-

contracted work?

M. Outside support services

Yes No


comment

1. Do you have a documented policy on

the procurement of supplies and support

services?

2. Do you keep records of such suppliers?

N. Compliance with ISO/IEC 17025 and PNAC Accreditation Requirements

Yes No

1. Do you consider that your laboratory complies with ISO/IEC 17025 and PNAC

accreditation requirements? (Pl see PNAC’s website for policies).

Area of non-compliance Rectified by

(date)

If "No" in which specific areas does it

not comply, and when do you expect

non-compliance be rectified?

Part 6 – Calibration Facility (for testing laboratories performing in-house calibrations)

Please answer every question, adding comments as necessary


comment

1. Does a fully documented calibration program

exist to ensure that the accuracy of equipment is

adequate for the service operated by the

laboratory?

2. Is a record maintained for test equipment,

including calibration results?



3. Are adequate facilities and environments

provided for calibration, handling, control, storage

and maintenance of all measuring equipment?

4. Are there documented procedures for calibrating

all equipment and reference standards which cover

the method of calibration and maximum, intervals

between calibrations?

5. Are the internal laboratory reference standards,

and the calibration of key testing equipment

traceable to national standard through:

PNAC accredited

Other bodies (specify)?

6. Does the lab participate in Proficiency Testing

for Calibration activities?

Part 7 - Other approvals (certifications/ accreditations)

Please detail current accreditation/approval held by your laboratory's calibration/ testing facility

Name & address of approval

body

Scope of accreditation/approval

and number of certificate (if

any)

Period of

accreditation/approval

Start Expiry Date

Part 8 - Declaration

This declaration should be made by the person named in Section 1.1

7.1 The laboratory applies for accreditation by PNAC for (please tick appropriate boxes)

Calibration

Testing

An extension in scope of existing accreditation for a:

Calibration laboratory

Testing Laboratory



7.2. The organisation/laboratory agrees to conform, upon accreditation, with PNAC requirements

as detailed in the Agreement [F-01/04].

7.3. I enclose a copy of Quality Manual and Quality Procedures (see Note below)

7.4. I enclose a cheque (payable to PNAC) for the Applicant fee of ________. I understand that

this fee is non-refundable. (see Note below).

7.5. I understand the manner in which the accreditation system functions.

7.6. I declare that the information given in this form is correct to the best of my knowledge and

belief

Signed _____________________________ Date ________________

Note: PNAC will not process your application until it has received your Quality Manual and Quality

Procedures and application fee. This fee is not required for extensions of scope.

When completed, return this Form to:

(Please mention type of Laboratory on the right corner of the

envelope such as testing/ calibration/ medical lab)

TO

THE DIRECTOR GENERAL

Pakistan National Accreditation Council

1-Constitution Avenue, Opposite Prime Minister Office, G-5/2,

Islamabad, Pakistan.

Tel: 051-9206044, 9209507, 9205509

Fax: 051-9209510

051-9222312

Section 5

Environmental Sampling

Rate Analysis

Section 5 of Chapter 2 Environmental Sampling Rate Analysis


ENVIRONMENTAL RATES

Rates for environmental sampling and analysis were obtained after a thorough market survey. Due to variation in the obtained rates a proper pattern cannot be

ascertained nor could a model be applied. Hence, the following rates have been calculated by averaging across the parameters for:

1. Ambient Air

2. Industrial Gaseous Emissions

3. Wastewater

4. Noise

Parameter

EPA

Testing

Charge

(Rs.)

Solution

Environmen

tal and

Technical

laboratory

National

Cleaner

Productio

n Centre

Environm

ental

Services

Pakistan

Green

Crescent

Environm

ental

Consultant

s (Pvt)

Ltd.

ECTECH

Environm

ent

Consultant

s

Green

Crescent

Quote 2.

Environm

ental

Services

Pakistan

Quote 2.

Qarshi

Research

TTI

Testing

lab

Recomme

nded Rate

for EMC

Ambient Air

Sulphur Dioxide

(SO2) 11600 15000 5,000 2500 2800 4500 3330 5000 4400 3250 5100

Oxides of Nitrogen

(NO) 11800 15000 5,000 2500 2800 4500 3330 5000 4400 3250 5100

Oxides of Nitrogen

(NO2) 11800 15000 5,000 2500 2800 4500 3330 5000 4400 3250 5100

Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx) 11800 - 5,000 2500 2800 4500 3330 5000 4400 3250 3800

Carbon Monoxide

(CO) 11400 15000 5,000 2500 2800 4500 3330 5000 4400 3250 5100

Particulate Matter

(PM10) 10600 10000 5,000 2500 2800 3500 3330 5000 4400 3250 4400

Particulate Matter

(PM2.5) 10600 10000 5,000 2500 2800 3500 3330 5000 4400 3250 4400

Total Hydrocarbons

(THC) 14200 - 5,000 2500 2800 4500 3330 5000 4400 - 3900

Ozone (O3) 9850 10000 5,000 2500 2800 4500 3330 5000 4400 3250 4500

Industrial Gaseous Emissions



Flue gaseous

emission (Sox) 11876 - - 2800 1938 5000 - - 1000 1200 2400

Flue gaseous

emission (Nox) 11876 - 5000 2800 1938 5000 - - 1000 1200 2800

Flue gaseous

emission (CO) 11876 - 5000 2800 1938 5000 - - 1000 1200 2800

Particulate Matter

(Dust) 16104 - - 2800 1938 5000 - - 1000 1200 2400

Smoke test 1560 - - 2800 1938 4500 - - 1000 1200 2300

Chlorine gas 14460 - - 2800 1938 5000 - - 15000 - 6200

Hydrogen Sulphide

(H2S) 15564 - 5000 2800 1938 5000 - - 1000 - 3100

Heavy metal

analysis 7481 - - 2800 1938 15000 - - 28000 - 11900

WasteWater

An-ionic detergents

(as MBAs) 3500 500 2,000 590 550 500 710 700 1100 640 800

Temperature 30 300 400 590 550 500 710 700 1100 640 600

pH value 60 300 500 590 550 500 710 700 1100 640 600

Biological Oxygen

Demand (BODs) 800 1000 2,500 590 550 7000 710 700 1100 640 1600

Chemical Oxygen

Demand (CODs) 800 1500 1,300 590 550 7000 710 700 1100 640 1600

Total Suspended

Solids (TSS) 300 300 500 590 550 2000 710 700 1100 640 800

Total Dissolve Solid

(TDS) 300 300 550 590 550 2000 710 700 1100 640 800

Oil and Grease 400 500 1,700 590 550 4000 710 700 1100 640 1200

Phenolic

Compounds 750 1000 1,800 590 550 5500 710 700 1100 640 1400

Chloride 150 500 800 590 550 2500 710 700 1100 640 900

Fluoride 250 300 800 590 550 2500 710 700 1100 640 900

Cyanide 250 1000 800 590 550 3000 710 700 1100 640 1000



Sulfates 200 1000 600 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1000

Sulphide 150 500 650 590 550 3000 710 700 1100 640 900

Ammonia 200 300 1,200 590 550 2000 710 700 1100 640 900

Copper 500 1000 1,500 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1100

Lead 500 1000 1,500 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1100

Nickel 500 500 1,500 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1100

Silver 500 500 1,500 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1100

Zinc 500 500 1,500 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1100

Barium 500 500 1,500 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1100

Iron 500 800 1,500 590 550 2500 710 700 1100 640 1000

Manganese 500 500 1,500 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1100

Boron 500 500 1,500 590 550 4000 710 700 1100 640 1100

Total Toxic Metals 500 200 1,500 590 550

710 700 1100 640 700

Mercury 700 500 1,500 590 550 3500 710 700 1100 640 1100

Slenium 700 1000 1,500 590 550 4500 710 700 1100 640 1300

Arsenic 700 1000 1,500 590 550 6000 710 700 1100 640 1400

Bacteriological

analysis of drinking

water sample Total

Coliform of Fecal

Coliform

1500

11100 10500 10000

10000

16,000 25255

2500 3000 5200

Chemical analysis

of drinking water

sample (excluding

metals and

pesticides)

5000

20000 16150 1100

0 15700

Noise

Noise Level 1500

400 500 3000

200 300 900

Chapter 2


Section 1


For Environmental Sampling

Section 1 of Chapter 2 Standard Operating Procedures for Environmental Sampling


Section 1

Standard Operating Procedures for

Environmental Sampling Standard Operating Procedures, commonly referred to as SOPs, are a set of instructions compiled by

an organization or firm to provide step-by step guidance to their personnel in carrying out a specific

task or function. SOPs are usually created on a standard format to assist workers for complex routine

operations. The idea behind having a standardized set of instructions is to improve efficiency,

consistency and quality of output.

Sampling is the science of collecting materials to be used as data for analysis and ascertaining

information. Samples should be taken in a way that is unbiased and the sample is representative of the

population it comes from.

Note: Site safety determinations should be made before proceeding with sampling.

EPA personnel are required to take environmental samples of the types mentioned below and thus

require SOPs for the following:

1. Water (drinking water, groundwater, surface water)

2. Wastewater

3. Industrial Gaseous Emissions

4. Motor Vehicle Exhaust and Noise

5. Ambient Air

6. Types of sampling (grab, composite)

Following are descriptions of environmental sampling procedures to allow the sampling personnel to

find a comfortable sequence of sampling.

1. WATER

Drinking Water

Scope This document describes general and specific procedures, methods and

considerations to be used and observed when collecting drinking water samples for

field screening or laboratory analysis.

Principle The procedures contained in this document are to be used by field personnel when

collecting and handling drinking water samples in the field. On the occasion that

field personnel determine that any of the procedures described in this section are

either inappropriate, inadequate or impractical and that another procedure must be

used to obtain a surface water sample, the variant procedure will be documented in

the field logbook, along with a description of the circumstances requiring its use.

Mention of trade names or commercial products in this operating procedure does

not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

Procedure 1. Prepare a Sampling and Analysis Plan (SAP) that describes the sampling

locations, numbers and types of samples to be collected, and the quality

control requirements of the project.

2. Check with the laboratory before collecting samples to ensure that sampling

equipment, preservatives, and procedures for sample collection are



acceptable. It is best to obtain sampling supplies directly from the laboratory

performing the analyses. Gather all equipment and supplies necessary for the

project.

3. The acids and bases used in preservation of many types of samples described

in this document are dangerous and must be handled with care. Always wear

gloves and eye protection when handling preservatives. When opening a

preservative bottle, particularly a glass ampoule, break open the ampoule

away from yourself and others. Have acid/base neutralization supplies

(baking soda) on hand in the event of a spill. If acid spills on your skin or

clothing, remove the contaminated clothing and rinse the area with water. Do

not apply baking soda (the heat of reaction can cause burns).

4. Collect samples in an area free of excessive dust, rain, snow or other sources

of contamination.

5. Select a cold water faucet for sampling which is free of contaminating

devices such as screens, aeration devices, hoses, purification devices or

swiveled faucets. Check the faucet to be sure it is clean. If the faucet is in a

state of disrepair, select another sampling location.

6. Collect samples from faucets which are high enough to put a bottle

underneath, generally the bath tub or kitchen sink, without contacting the

mouth of the container with the faucet.

7. Open the faucet and thoroughly flush. Generally 2 to 3 minutes will suffice,

however longer times may be needed, especially in the case of lead

distribution lines. Typically the water temperature will stabilize which

indicates flushing is completed. Once the lines are flushed, adjust the flow so

it does not splash against the walls of the bathtub, sink or other surfaces.

8. Follow the collection instructions provided for the analytes of interest

described on the following pages. Wear eye protection and gloves if you are

handling containers with acidic/basic preservatives and when you are

collecting samples.

9. Select a cold water faucet for sampling which is free from devices that are

designed to change the water composition, such as water softeners or point of

use filters. DO NOT remove any screens or aeration devices.

10. Fill out the chain of custody form with the sample collection information.

Record the site location, name of the sampler, date and time of collection,

method of collection, type of analysis to be completed, and preservative in

use.

11. Deliver or ship samples to the laboratory to ensure that holding times are met.

Holding time starts at sample collection and ends at preparation and/or

analysis. Be sure to allow time for the laboratory to process the samples.

12. Return empty preservative containers to the laboratory for proper disposal.

Biological Contaminants

1. Bacteria and Coliphage: Total coliforms; fecal coliforms; E. coli; enterococci;

heterotrophic bacteria; or coliphage

2. Bottle to use: Sterile 125 or 150 mL plastic bottles must be used.

3. Preservatives to use: Sodium thiosulfate (if sample is chlorinated) and cool to

< 10°C for source water and groundwater samples (recommended for

drinking water as well) but do not allow samples to freeze.



4. Holding times: Holding times are generally very short – 8 hours for source

water compliance samples, 30 hours for drinking water samples, 48 hours for

coliphage samples. Deliver samples to the lab the day of collection if possible

or ship via overnight delivery.

5. Sampling instructions: Wear gloves when collecting samples. Do not rinse

the bottles. The bottles are sterile so care must be taken not to contaminate

the bottle or cap. Once the distribution line is flushed and the flow reduced,

quickly open the bottle (but do not set the cap down), hold the cap by its

outside edges only, and fill the sample bottle to just above the 100 mL line

leaving a one inch headspace. Cap the bottle immediately and place it into a

cooler with ice for delivery or overnight shipment to the laboratory.

Total coliform and E. coli sampling

1. Remove any attachments on the faucet

2. Allow water to flow for 5 or 6 minutes before sampling

3. Do not rinse or overfill container

4. Always collect cold water; never sample hot water

5. Do not touch the inside of the sample bottle or its cap

Avoid these sampling sites for total coliform, if possible

Outdoor faucets

Faucets connected to cisterns, softeners, pumps, pressure tanks or hot water

heaters

New plumbing and fixtures or those repaired recently

Faucets that hot and cold water come through

Threaded taps

Swing spouts

Faucets positioned close to sink or ground

Leaky faucets

Classical Chemistry Constituents and Nutrients (IOCs)

1. Acidity, alkalinity, biological oxygen demand, bromate, chloride, chlorite,

color, conductivity, fluoride, foaming agents, nitrate, nitrite, odor, o-

phosphate, residues, silica, sulfate, surfactants, total dissolved solids, total

suspended solids, turbidity

2. Bottles to use: Plastic or glass bottles may be used but plastic is preferred.

3. Preservative to use: Cool to ≤ 4 °C (≤ 39.2 °F)

4. Holding times: Most of these analytes have short holding times. Deliver

samples to the lab the same day if possible or ship via overnight delivery.

Check with the lab regarding the holding times for the specific analytes of

interest.

5. Sampling Instructions: Check with the laboratory on the sample volume

required for analysis. Wear gloves and eye protection when collecting

samples. Rinse the bottle and cap three times with sample water and fill the

bottle to within one to two inches from the top. Place the sample into a cooler

with ice for immediate delivery or shipment to the laboratory.

Cyanide


2. Preservatives to use:

0.6 g ascorbic acid if sample is chlorinated

sodium hydroxide (NaOH) to pH > 12

cool to ≤ 4 °C (≤ 39.2 °F)

3. Holding time:14 days

4. Sampling instructions: Check with the laboratory on the sample volume



required for analysis. Wear gloves and eye protection when handling acids

and other preservatives and while collecting samples. If the bottle contains a

preservative, do not rinse the bottle. If the preservatives are not included in

the bottle, rinse the bottle and cap three times with sample water, fill the

bottle, and then carefully add the preservatives following the instructions

provided by the laboratory. The bottle should be filled to within one to two

inches from the top. Place the sample into a cooler with ice for delivery or

shipment to the laboratory.

Metals (IOCs)

1. Antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, cadmium, calcium, chromium (total),

magnesium, manganese, mercury, nickel, selenium, sodium, silver, thallium,

lead, copper, zinc and other trace metals


3. Note: 1000 mL wide-mouth bottles are recommended for collection of lead

and copper rule compliance samples.

4. Preservative to use: Nitric acid (HNO3) to pH < 2

5. Holding times: 28 days for mercury, 6 months for other metals


required for analysis. Wear gloves and eye protection when handling acid and

while collecting samples. If the bottle contains a preservative, do not rinse the

bottle. If the preservatives are not included in the bottle, rinse the bottle and

cap three times with sample water, fill the bottle, and then carefully add the

preservatives following the instructions provided by the laboratory. The

bottle should be filled to within one to two inches from the top. Deliver or

ship the samples to the laboratory.

Lead and Copper Rule Compliance Samples:

Do not remove aerators or rinse bottles. Use the bathroom tap if the kitchen tap has

a water softener or point of use filter on it.

Note: If samples are not acid preserved, they must be received by the laboratory

within 14 days of sampling.

1. Radionuclides: Gross alpha, gross beta.


3. Preservatives to Use: Hydrochloric acid (HCl) or nitric acid (HNO3)

preservation for all analytes.

4. Holding times: 8 days for Iodine-131, 6 months for all other radionuclides


required for analysis. Wear gloves and eye protection when handling acids

and other preservatives and while collecting samples. If the bottle contains a

preservative, do not rinse the bottle. If the preservatives are not included in

the bottle, rinse the bottle and cap three times with sample water, fill the

bottle, and then carefully add the preservatives following the instructions

provided by the laboratory. The bottle should be filled to within one to two

inches from the top. Deliver or ship samples to the laboratory.

6. Synthetic Organic Compounds (SOCs)

Interferences 1. Proper safety precautions must be observed when collecting surface water

samples. Refer to the Safety, Health and Environmental Management

Program (SHEMP) Procedures and Policy Manual and any pertinent site-

specific Health and Safety Plans (HASP) for guidelines on safety precautions.

These guidelines should be used to complement the judgment of an

experienced professional. Address chemicals that pose specific toxicity or

safety concerns and follow any other relevant requirements, as appropriate.

2. Special care must be taken not to contaminate samples. This includes storing



samples in a secure location to preclude conditions which could alter the

properties of the sample. Samples shall be custody sealed during long-term

storage or shipment.

3. Collected samples are in the custody of the sampler or sample custodian until

the samples are relinquished to another party.

4. If samples are transported by the sampler, they will remain under his/her

custody or be secured until they are relinquished.

5. Documentation of field sampling is done in a bound logbook.

6. Chain-of-custody documents shall be filled out and remain with the samples

until custody is relinquished.

7. All shipping documents, such as air bills, bills of lading, etc., shall be

retained by the sampling leader and stored in a secure place.

Quality

Control

Samples should be collected from an area free of excessive dust, rain, snow or other

sources of contamination.

A cold water faucet should be considered for sampling which is free of

contaminating devices such as screens, aeration devices, hoses, purification devices

or swiveled faucets. Make sure the faucet is clean. If the faucet is in a state of

disrepair, select another sampling location. Height of faucet should be considered

into account before collecting the sample. Flush the faucet for 2 to 3 minutes

prior to sample collection. However, longer times may be needed, especially in

the case of any distribution line contamination. Avoid splashing against the

walls of the bathtub, sink or other surfaces.

Surface Water and Ground Water

Scope The procedures contained in this document are to be used by field personnel when

collecting and handling surface water samples in the field. On the occasion that

field personnel determine that any of the procedures described in this section are

either inappropriate, inadequate or impractical and that another procedure must be

used to obtain a surface water sample, the variant procedure will be documented in

the field logbook, along with a description of the circumstances requiring its use.

Mention of trade names or commercial products in this operating procedure does

not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

Apparatus The physical location of the investigator when collecting a sample may dictate the

equipment to be used. If surface water samples are required, direct dipping of the

sample container into the stream is desirable. Collecting samples in this manner is

possible when sampling from accessible locations such as stream banks or by

wading or from low platforms, such as small boats or piers. Wading or streamside

sampling from banks, however, may cause the re-suspension of bottom deposits

and bias the sample. Wading is acceptable if the stream has a noticeable current (is

not impounded), and the samples are collected while facing upstream. If the stream

is too deep to wade, or if the sample must be collected from more than one water

depth, or if the sample must be collected from an elevated platform (bridge, pier,

etc.), supplemental sampling equipment must be used.

To collect a surface water sample from a water body or other surface water

conveyance, a variety of methods can be used:

Dipping Using Sample Container



Scoops

Peristaltic Pumps

Discrete Depth Samplers

Bailers

Buckets

Submersible Pumps

Automatic Samplers

Regardless of the method used, precautions should be taken to ensure that

the sample collected is representative of the water body or conveyance.

Dipping Using Sample Container

A sample may be collected directly into the sample container when the surface

water source is accessible by wading or other means. The sampler should face

upstream if there is a current and collect the sample without disturbing the bottom

sediment. The surface water sample should always be collected prior to the

collection of a sediment sample at the same location. The sampler should be careful

not to displace the preservative from a pre-preserved sample container, such as the

40-ml VOC vial.

Scoops

Stainless steel scoops provide a means of collecting surface water samples from

surface water bodies that are too deep to access by wading. They have a limited

reach of about eight feet and, if samples from distances too far to access using this

method are needed, a mobile platform, such as a boat, may be required. Stainless

steel scoops are useful for reaching out into a body of water to collect a surface

water sample. The scoop may be used directly to collect and transfer a surface

water sample to the sample container, or it may be attached to an extension in order

to access the selected sampling location.

Peristaltic Pumps

Another device that can be effectively used to sample a water column, such as a

shallow pond or stream, is the peristaltic pump/vacuum jug system. The peristaltic

pump can be used to collect a water sample from any depth if the pump is located

at or near the surface water elevation. There is no suction limit for these

applications. The use of a metal conduit to which the tubing is attached, allows for

the collection of a vertical sample (to about a 25-foot depth) which is representative

of the water column. The tubing intake is positioned in the water column at the

desired depth by means of the conduit. Using this method, discrete samples may be

collected by positioning the tubing intake at one depth or a vertical composite may

be collected by moving the tubing intake at a constant rate vertically up and down

the water column over the interval to be composited.

Samples for VOC analysis cannot be collected directly from the peristaltic pump

discharge or from the vacuum jug. If a peristaltic pump is used for sample

collection and VOC analysis is required, the VOC sample must be collected using

one of the “soda straw” variations. Ideally, the tubing intake will be placed at the

depth from which the sample is to be collected and the pump will be run for several

minutes to fill the tubing with water representative of that interval. After several



minutes, the pump is turned off and the tubing string is retrieved. The pump speed

is then reduced to a slow pumping rate and the pump direction is reversed. After

turning the pump back on, the sample stream is collected into the VOC vials as it is

pushed from the tubing by the pump. Care must be taken to prevent any water that

was in contact with the silastic pump head tubing from being incorporated into the

sample.

Discrete Depth Samplers

When discrete samples are desired from a specific depth, and the parameters to be

measured do not require a Teflon®-coated sampler, a standard Kemmerer or Van

Dorn sampler may be used. The Kemmerer sampler is a brass cylinder with rubber

stoppers that leave the ends of the sampler open while being lowered in a vertical

position, thus allowing free passage of water through the cylinder. The Van Dorn

sampler is plastic and is lowered in a horizontal position. In each case, a messenger

is sent down a rope when the sampler is at the designated depth, to cause the

stoppers to close the cylinder, which is then raised. Water is removed through a

valve to fill respective sample containers. With a rubber tube attached to the valve,

dissolved oxygen sample bottles can be properly filled by allowing an overflow of

the water being collected. With multiple depth samples, care should be taken not to

disturb the bottom sediment, thus biasing the sample.

When metals and organic compounds parameters are of concern, then a double-

check valve, stainless steel bailer or Kemmerer sampler should be used to collect

the sample.

Bailers

Teflon® bailers may also be used for surface water sampling if the study objectives

do not necessitate a sample from a discrete interval in the water column. A closed-

top bailer with a bottom check-valve is sufficient for many studies. As the bailer is

lowered through the water column, water is continually displaced through the bailer

until the desired depth is reached, at which point the bailer is retrieved. This

technique may not be successful where strong currents are found.

Buckets

A plastic bucket can be used to collect samples for measurement of water quality

parameters such as pH, temperature, and conductivity. Samples collected for

analysis of classical water quality parameters including but not limited to ammonia,

nitrate-nitrite, phosphorus, and total organic carbon may also be collected with a

bucket. Typically, a bucket is used to collect a sample when the water depth is too

great for wading, it is not possible to deploy a boat, or access is not possible

(excessive vegetation or steep embankments) and the water column is well mixed.

The water body is usually accessed from a bridge. The bucket is normally lowered

by rope over the side of the bridge. Upon retrieval, the water is poured into the

appropriate sample containers

Caution should be exercised whenever working from a bridge. Appropriate

measures should be taken to insure the safety of sampling personnel from traffic

hazards.



Submersible Pumps

Submersible pumps can be used to collect surface water samples directly into a

sample container. The constituents of interest should be taken into consideration

when choosing the type of submersible pump and tubing to be used. If trace

contaminant sampling of extractable organic compounds and/or inorganic analytes

will be conducted, the submersible pump and all of its components should be

constructed of inert materials such as stainless steel and Teflon®. The tubing

should also be constructed of Teflon®. If re-using the same pump between sample

locations, the pump should be decontaminated before next sample collection. New

tubing should be used at each sample location.

If the samples will be analyzed for classical parameters such as ammonia, nitrate-

nitrite, phosphorus, or total organic carbon, the pump and tubing may be

constructed of components other than stainless steel and Teflon®. The same pump

and tubing may be re-used at each sampling station after rinsing with deionized

water and then purging several volumes of sample water through the pump and

tubing prior to filling the sample containers.

Either a grab or composite sample can be collected using a submersible pump. A

composite sample can be collected by raising and lowering the pump throughout

the water column. If a composite sample is collected, it may be necessary to pump

the sample into a compositing vessel for mixing prior to dispensing into the sample

containers. If a compositing vessel is required, it should be constructed of materials

compatible with the constituents of concern and decontaminated between sample

stations according to appropriate procedures, again depending on the constituents

of concern.

Automatic Samplers

Where unattended sampling is required (e.g., storm-event sampling, time-of-travel

studies) an automatic sampler may be used. The automatic sampling device may be

used to collect grab samples based on time, in-stream flow or water level or used to

collect composite samples as dictated by the study data needs. The automatic

sampling device should be calibrated prior to deployment to insure the proper

volume is collected. The manufacturer’s instruction manual should be consulted for

automatic sampler operation.

Special Sampling Considerations

Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Analysis

Surface water samples for VOC analysis must be collected in 40 ml glass vials with

Teflon® septa. The vial may be either preserved with concentrated hydrochloric

acid or they may be unpreserved. Preserved samples have a two-week holding time,

whereas, unpreserved samples have only a seven-day holding time. In the great

majority of cases, the preserved vials are used to take advantage of the extended

holding time. In some situations, however, it may be necessary to use the

unpreserved vials. For example, if the surface water sample contains a high

concentration of dissolved calcium carbonate, there may be an effervescent reaction

between the hydrochloric acid and the water, producing large numbers of fine

bubbles. This will render the sample unacceptable. In this case, unpreserved vials

should be used and arrangements must be confirmed with the laboratory to ensure



that they can accept the unpreserved vials and meet the shorter sample holding

times.

The samples should be collected with as little agitation or disturbance as possible.

The vial should be filled so that there is a reverse or convex meniscus at the top of

the vial and absolutely no bubbles or headspace should be present in the vial after it

is capped. After the cap is securely tightened, the vial should be inverted and

tapped on the palm of one hand to see if any undetected bubbles are dislodged. If a

bubble or bubbles are present, the vial should be topped off using a minimal

amount of sample to re-establish the meniscus. Care should be taken not to flush

any preservative out of the vial during topping off. If, after topping off and capping

the vial, bubbles are still present, a new vial should be obtained and the sample re-

collected.

Samples for VOC analysis must be collected using either stainless steel or Teflon®

equipment.

Special Precautions for Surface Water Sampling

A clean pair of new, non-powdered, disposable gloves will be worn each time a

different location is sampled and the gloves should be donned immediately prior to

sampling. The gloves should not come in contact with the media being sampled and

should be changed any time during sample collection when their cleanliness is

compromised.

Sample containers for samples suspected of containing high concentrations of

contaminants shall be stored separately. All background or control samples shall be

collected and placed in separate ice chests or shipping containers. Sample

collection activities shall proceed progressively from the least suspected

contaminated area to the most suspected contaminated area. Samples of waste or

highly contaminated media must not be placed in the same ice chest as

environmental (i.e., containing low contaminant levels) or background samples.

If possible, one member of the field sampling team should take all the notes and

photographs, fill out tags, etc., while the other members collect the samples.

Samplers must use new, verified and certified-clean disposable or non-disposable

equipment.

Sample Handling and Preservation Requirements

Surface water samples will typically be collected either by directly filling the

container from the surface water body being sampled or by decanting the water

from a collection device such as a stainless steel scoop or other device.

During sample collection, if transferring the sample from a collection device, make

sure that the device does not come in contact with the sample containers.

Place the sample into appropriate, labeled containers. Samples collected for VOC

analysis must not have any headspace. All other sample containers must be filled

with an allowance for ullage.

All samples requiring preservation must be preserved as soon as practically

possible, ideally immediately at the time of sample collection. If preserved VOC

vials are used, these will be preserved with concentrated hydrochloric acid by lab



personnel prior to departure for the field investigation. For all other chemical

preservatives, use the appropriate chemical preservative generally stored in an

individual single-use vial. The adequacy of sample preservation will be checked

after the addition of the preservative for all samples, except for the samples

collected for VOC analysis. If it is determined that a sample is not adequately

preserved, additional preservative should be added to achieve adequate

preservation.

All samples preserved using a pH adjustment (except VOCs) must be checked,

using pH strips, to ensure that they were adequately preserved. This is done by

pouring a small volume of sample over the strip. Do not place the strip in the

sample. Samples requiring reduced temperature storage should be placed on ice

immediately.

Interferences Special care must be taken not to contaminate samples. This includes storing

samples in a secure location to preclude conditions which could alter the

properties of the sample. Samples shall be custody sealed during long-term

storage or shipment.

Collected samples are in the custody of the sampler or sample custodian until


If samples are transported by the sampler, they will remain under his/her


Documentation of field sampling is done in a bound logbook.

Chain-of-custody documents shall be filled out and remain with the samples


All shipping documents, such as air bills, bills of lading, etc., shall be retained

by the sampling leader and stored in a secure place.

Quality

Control

If possible, a control sample should be collected from a location not affected by the

possible contaminants of concern and submitted with the other samples. In streams

or other bodies of moving water, the control sample should be collected upstream

of the sampled area. For impounded bodies of water, particularly small lakes or

ponds, it may be difficult or inappropriate to obtain an unbiased control from the

same body of water from which the samples are collected. In these cases, it may be

appropriate to collect a background sample from a similar impoundment located

near the sampled body of water if there is a reasonable certainty that the

background location has not been impacted. Equipment blanks should be collected

if equipment is field cleaned and re-used on-site or if necessary to document that

low-level contaminants were not introduced by pumps, bailers or other sampling

equipment.

2.WASTEWATER

Scope This document describes both general and specific methods to be used by field

personnel when collecting and handling wastewater samples in the field. On the

occasion that field personnel determine that any of the procedures described in this

section are inappropriate, inadequate or impractical and that another procedure

must be used to obtain a wastewater sample, the variant procedure will be

documented in the field log book, along with a description of the circumstances

requiring its use. Mention of trade names or commercial products does not



constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

Principle The wastewater sampling techniques and equipment described in the following

section of this document are designed to minimize effects on the chemical and

physical integrity of the sample. If the procedures in these sections are

followed, a representative sample of the wastewater should be obtained.

The variety of conditions at different sampling locations requires that considerable

judgment be exercised regarding the methodologies and procedures for the

collection of representative samples of wastewater.

The sample should be collected where the wastewater is well mixed.

Therefore, the sample should be collected near the center of the flow channel,

at approximately 40 to 60 percent of the water depth, where the turbulence is

at a maximum and the possibility of solids settling is minimized. Skimming

the water surface or dragging the channel bottom should be avoided.

However, allowances should be made for fluctuations in water depth due to

flow variations.

In sampling from wide conduits, cross-sectional sampling should be

considered. Rhodamine WT dye may be used as an aid in determining the

most representative sampling locations.

If manual compositing is employed, the individual sample portions must be

thoroughly mixed before pouring the individual aliquots into the composite

container. For manual composite sampling, the individual sample aliquots

should be preserved at the time of sample collection.

Apparatus/

Procedure Automatic Sampling

Automatic samplers may be used to collect composite or grab samples when

several aliquots are to be collected at frequent intervals or when a continuous

sample is required. For composite sampling applications, the automatic samplers

may be used to collect time composite or flow proportional samples. In the flow

proportional mode, the samplers are activated and paced by a compatible flow

meter. Flow proportional samples can also be collected using an automatic sampler

equipped with multiple containers and manually compositing the individual sample

portions proportional to the flow.

Automatic samplers must meet the following requirements:

Sampling equipment must be properly cleaned to avoid cross-

contamination which could result from prior use.

No plastic or metal parts of the sampler shall come in contact with the

water or wastewater stream when parameters to be analyzed could be

impacted by these materials.

The automatic sampler must be capable of providing adequate refrigeration

during the sampling period. This can be accomplished in the field by using

ice.

The automatic sampler must be able to collect a large enough sample for all

parameter analyses.

The individual sample aliquot must be at least 100 mL if the sampler uses a

peristaltic pump.



The automatic sampler should be capable of providing a lift of at least 20

feet and the sample volume should be adjustable since the volume is a

function of the pumping head.

The pumping velocity must be at least two (2) ft. /sec to transport solids

and not allow solids to settle.

The intake line leading to the pump must be purged before each sample is

collected.

The minimum inside diameter of the intake line should be 1/4 inch.

An adequate power source should be available to operate the sampler for

the time required to complete the sampling. Facility electrical outlets may

be used if available.

Facility automatic samplers should only be used if

a. field conditions do not allow for the installation of EPA sampling

equipment, and

b. the facility sampling equipment meets all of the requirements

detailed above.

Conventional Sampling (Inorganic Parameters)

Conventional sampling includes all inorganic parameters (e.g., BOD5,

TSS, COD, nutrients) that can be collected using an automatic sampler.

New tubing (Silastic ®, or equal, in the pump and either Teflon ® or Tygon

®, or equal, in the sample train) will be used for each sampler installation.

Installation procedures for installing tubing on a sampler include cutting

the proper length of tubing, positioning it in the wastewater stream, and

sampler programming. Protective gloves should be worn to reduce

exposure and to maintain the integrity of the sample.

For a time composite sample, the sampler should be programmed to collect

sufficiently sized aliquots (at least 100-milliliter if using a peristaltic pump) at a

frequency that provides a representative sample and enough sample volume to

conduct all required analyses.

For a flow proportional sample, the sampler should be programmed to collect a

minimum of 100 -milliliters for each sample aliquot with the interval predetermined

based on the flow of the monitored stream.

At the end of the compositing period, the sample collected should be properly

mixed and transferred into the respective containers, followed by immediate

preservation, if required. For routine inspections, the permittee should be offered a

split sample.

Metals

When an automatic sampler is used for collecting samples for metals analyses, the

entire sample collection system is rinsed with organic-free water and an equipment

rinse blank is collected. The equipment rinse blank is taken to ensure that metals

contamination is not occurring from the sampling equipment, and to check the

effectiveness of the decontamination procedures. To collect an equipment rinse

blank approximately one-half gallon of rinse water should be pumped through the

sample tubing into the composite container and discarded. After the purge, another

one-half gallon of rinse water is pumped through the sample tubing, into the

composite container, and collected as an equipment rinse blank. Once the



equipment rinse blank sample is collected, it must be properly preserved with Nitric

acid. The automatic sampler may then be positioned in the appropriate location and

the sampler program initiated.

If the automatic sampler tubing is attached to a metal conduit pipe, the intake

tubing should be carefully installed upstream and away from the conduit to prevent

metals contamination. This can be accomplished by clamping the tubing upstream

of the conduit using laboratory clamps and wrapping the submerged portion of

conduit pipe with a protective barrier (e.g., duct tape).

Extractable Organic Compounds, Pesticides and PCBs

When an automatic sampler is used for collecting samples for the analyses of

extractable organic compounds, pesticides and/or PCBs, the installation procedures

include cutting the proper length of new Teflon7 tubing, rinsing of the entire

sampler collection system with organic-free water and collection of appropriate

equipment blanks for organic compounds analysis. For the organic-free water rinse,

approximately one-half gallons is initially pumped into the composite sample

container and discarded. An additional one and one-half gallons (approximate) are

then pumped into the composite sample container for distribution into the

appropriate blank container. Finally, the collection tubing should be positioned in

the wastewater stream and the sampler programmed and initiated.

Automatic Sampler Security

Field investigators should take whatever steps are necessary to prevent tampering

with EPA equipment. A lock or custody seal may be placed on the sampler to

detect tampering. However, this does not prevent tampering with the sample

collection tubing. If necessary, seals may be placed on the sampling pole and tubing

line to further reduce tampering possibilities.

Automatic Sampler Maintenance, Calibration and Quality Control

To ensure proper operation of automatic samplers, and thus the collection of re-

presentative samples, the following maintenance and calibration procedures should

be used and any deviations should be documented in the field logbook.

Prior to being used, the sampler operation should be checked by the field

investigator or Field Equipment Center personnel to ensure proper operation. This

includes operation (forward, reverse, and automatic) of at least one purge-pump-

purge cycle; checking desiccant and replacing if necessary; checking the 12-volt

batteries to be used with the sampler; and repairing any item if necessary.

During each field trip, prior to initiating the automatic sampler, the rinse and purge-

pump-purge cycle shall be checked at least once. The pumping volume should be

checked at least twice using a graduated cylinder or other calibrated container prior

to initiating the sampler. For flow proportional sampling, the flow meter that

activates the sampler should be checked to ensure that it operates properly.

Upon returning from a field trip, the structural integrity of the sampler should be

examined and repaired, if necessary. The desiccant will be checked and replaced if

appropriate. The operation (forward, reverse, automatic, etc.) will be checked and

required repairs will be made and documented. The sampler will then be cleaned



and decontaminated.

The automatic sampler should be checked against the manufacturer's specifications

and documented whenever one or more of the sampler functions appear to be

operating improperly.

Manual Sampling

Manual sampling is normally used for collecting grab samples and/or for immediate

in-situ field analyses. However, it can also be used in lieu of automatic equipment

over extended periods of time for composite sampling, especially when it is

necessary to evaluate unusual waste stream conditions.

The best method to manually collect a sample is to use the actual sample container

which will be used to transport the sample to the laboratory. This eliminates the

possibility of contaminating the sample with intermediate collection containers. If

the water or wastewater stream cannot be physically reached by the sampling

personnel or it is not safe to reach for the sample, an intermediate collection

container may be used, from which the sample can be redistributed to other

containers. If this is done, however, the container used to collect the sample must

be properly cleaned and must be made of a material that meets the requirements of

the parameter(s) being investigated. Samples for oil and grease, bacteria, and most

volatile compounds must always be collected directly into the sample container.

In some cases it may be best to use a pump, either power or hand operated, to

withdraw a sample from the water or wastewater stream. If a pump is used, it is

imperative that all components of the pump that come in contact with the sample

are properly cleaned to ensure the integrity of the sample.

In general, samples are manually collected by first selecting a location in the waste

stream that is well mixed then dipping the container in the water or wastewater

stream so the mouth of the container faces upstream. The container should not be

overfilled if preservatives are present in the container.

Interferences The following precautions should be considered when collecting wastewater

samples.

Special care must be taken not to contaminate samples. This includes storing

samples in a secure location to preclude conditions which could alter the properties

of the sample. Samples shall be custody sealed during long-term storage or

shipment.

Collected samples are in the custody of the sampler or sample custodian until


If samples are transported by the sampler, they will remain under his/her


Documentation of field sampling is done in a bound logbook.

Chain-of-custody documents shall be filled out and remain with the samples


All shipping documents, such as air bills, bills of lading, etc., shall be

retained by the project leader and stored in a secure place.

Quality Equipment blanks should be collected if equipment is field cleaned and re-used

on-site or if necessary to document that low-level contaminants were not



Control introduced by the sampling equipment.

3. INDUSTRIAL GASEOUS EMISSIONS

This procedure is for measuring Sulfur Dioxide (SO2), nitrogen oxides (NOx), Carbon Monoxide

(CO), Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Oxygen (O2) in stationary source emissions using a continuous

instrumental analyzer

Sr. No. Parameter

1. Sulphur oxides

2. Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)

3. Oxides of Nitrogen; (NO) and (NO2)

4. Carbon Monoxide (CO)

5. Oxygen (O2)

6. Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

Scope The monitoring of stack emissions can involve taking samples for onsite analysis

and laboratory analysis. Its primary use is for regulatory purposes, including

measurements for determining compliance with authorized numerical limits and

acceptance trials on new pollution abatement plant.

Principle Quality assurance and quality control requirements are included to assure that the

tester collects data of known quality and documents adherence to these specific

requirements for equipment, supplies, sample collection and analysis,

calculations, and data analysis. In this method, a sample of the effluent gas is

continuously sampled and conveyed to the analyzer that measures the

concentration of respective analyte.

Apparatus Sample Probe: Glass, stainless steel, or other approved material, of sufficient

length to traverse the sample points.

Sample Line: The sample line from the probe to the conditioning

system/sample pump should be made of Teflon or other material that does not

absorb or otherwise alter the sample gas. For a dry-basis measurement system,

the temperature of the sample line must be maintained at a sufficiently high

level to prevent condensation before the sample conditioning components. For

wet-basis measurement systems, the temperature of the sample line must be

maintained at a sufficiently high level to prevent condensation before the

analyzer.

Conditioning Equipment: For dry basis measurements, a condenser, dryer or

other suitable device is required to remove moisture continuously from the

sample gas. Any equipment needed to heat the probe or sample line to avoid

condensation prior to the sample conditioning component is also required.

For wet basis systems, you must keep the sample above its dew point either by:

Heating the sample line and all sample transport components up to the inlet of

the analyzer (and, for hot-wet extractive systems, also heating the analyzer), or

by diluting the sample prior to analysis using a dilution probe system. The

components required to do either of the above are considered to be conditioning



equipment.

Sampling Pump: A leak-free pump is needed to pull the sample gas through

the system at a flow rate sufficient to minimize the response time of the

measurement system. The pump may be constructed of any material that is non-

reactive to the gas being sampled. For dilution-type measurement systems, an

ejector pump is used to create a vacuum that draws the sample through a critical

orifice at a constant rate.

SO2 Analyzer: An ultra violet, nondispersive infrared, fluorescence, or other

detection principle to continuously measure SO2 in the gas stream.

NOx Analyzer: An analyzer that operates on the principle of chem-

iluminescence with an NO2 to NO converter is one example of an analyzer that

has been used successfully in the past. Analyzers operating on other principles

may also be used.

CO Analyzer: An analyzer that continuously measures CO in the gas stream.

CO2 Analyzer: An analyzer that continuously measures CO2 in the gas stream.

O2 Analyzer: An analyzer that continuously measures O2 in the gas stream.

Procedure 1. Preliminary site inspection: Prior to testing, physical inspection of the source to

be tested is used to establish the location of sampling access holes and

determine accessibility and work platform requirements (including power and

safety). Discussion with site personnel should include plant operating

conditions and plant safety requirements for testing equipment and testing

personnel. The inspection should also determine if access holes are pre-

existing, and that access hole covers can be removed for sampling (not

corroded shut). Preliminary determinations of temperature, velocity, pressure

and moisture content can then be made. If the sampling plane fails to meet the

requirements necessary for obtaining a representative sample then alternative

sampling locations should be sought.

2. Following the inspections, and after considering the test objectives and plant

operating conditions, a decision can be made on the sampling equipment and

test procedures to be employed.

3. Sampling emissions for gases: Multi-point sampling is generally not required

for sampling of gaseous emissions. However, in some situations, notably after

the junction of several different streams, stratification of the gas stream will

persist for some distance downstream.

4. A survey of a suitable constituent of the gas stream such as carbon dioxide or

oxygen should be performed to determine the degree of stratification. In cases

where stratification does not exist, single point sampling at one quarter the

diameter across the stack, should be representative of the gaseous emission.

5. If stratification exists, the gaseous emission determination will require multi-

point sampling techniques, unless an alternative sampling plane can be found.

6. Sample Collection: Position the probe at the first sampling point. Purge the

system for the response time before recording any data. Then, traverse all

required sampling points, sampling at each point for an equal length of time and

maintaining the appropriate sample flow rate. Each time the probe is removed

from the stack and replaced, you must wait for the instrument to normalize the

readings prior to your next recording. If the average of any run exceeds the

calibration span value, that run is invalid.



Interferences Instrumental gas analyzers are often used in a semi-continuous (batch) monitoring

mode to measure emissions for short periods of time (typically from 1-hour to

several days). These systems are not permanently attached to the stack and

generally stack gases are withdrawn from the discharge through a gas conditioning

system to the instrumental analyzer.

Because of the variety of parameters measured and techniques available in gas

analyzers it is not possible to specify performance specifications for all types of

instrumental analyzers. However, users must operate equipment according to the

manufacturer’s instructions and be familiar with the characteristics of their analyzer

for their particular application. A requirement for instrumental analyzers is that the

following performance characteristics are assessed before use:

response time,

zero and span drift,

detection limit,

effect of interfering substances, and

effect of temperature and pressure on instrument stability.

Quality

Control

Gas withdrawn from the discharge through the gas conditioning system must not

change the integrity of the sample gas. As the conditioning system and instrumental

analyzers are normally cold started, sufficient warm-up and conditioning time must

be allowed before calibration and measurements are commenced.

4. MOTOR VEHICLE EXHAUST AND NOISE

Scope This document describes general and specific procedures, methods and

considerations to be used and observed when measuring sound pressure emission

levels from stationary and mobile motor vehicles for field measurements.

Principle The procedures contained in this document are to be used by field personnel when

measuring sound pressure emission levels from stationary and mobile motor

vehicles in the field. On the occasion that field personnel determine that any of the

procedures described in this section are either inappropriate, inadequate or

impractical and that another procedure must be used to obtain a surface water

sample, the variant procedure will be documented in the field logbook, along with a

description of the circumstances requiring its use. Mention of trade names or

commercial products in this operating procedure does not constitute endorsement or

recommendation for use.

Procedure Motor Vehicles (Stationary)

13. While the vehicle is being tested, any ancillary equipment, such as

refrigeration units, or agitator drum drives, must be in operation except where

that equipment would only be in operation whilst the vehicle is stationary or

travelling on a road at a speed of less than 8 km/h.

14. The measurements must be made in the open air where the ambient noise

level is at least 10 dB(A) below the noise level being measured.

15. The test site may take the form of an open space or beneath a canopy if no

part of the canopy or its supports is within 3 metres of the microphone.

16. The test site within 3 metres of the microphone must be substantially flat and

may include kerbs, channels, gutter, poles or other objects not providing



excessive acoustic reflection provided that no such object is within 1 metre of

the microphone.

17. Whilst testing is in progress no person other than the testing officer and any

occupants of the vehicle or, in the case of a motor cycle, the rider, must be

within 1 metre of the microphone.

18. The sound level meter is to be set to A-weighted frequency response and fast

time response.

19. Where one microphone position is used the noise level of the vehicle must be

the repeatable maximum level recorded.

20. Where more than one microphone position is used the noise level at each

microphone position must be determined as if it were the only one. The noise

level of the vehicle must be the higher or highest noise levels.

21. Non-integer results must be rounded down to the nearest whole decibel.

Motor Vehicles (Mobile)

1. While the vehicle is being tested, any ancillary equipment, such as




2. The measurements must be made at an open site where the ambient noise

level is at least 10 dB(A) below the noise level being measured.

3. The site may take the form of an open space having a central part of at least

30 m radius, practically level, consisting of concrete, asphalt or similar

material and not covered with powdery snow, tall grass, loose soil or the like.

The surface of the test track must be dry and must not cause excessive tyre

noise.

4. During the test no one must be in the measurement area except the testing

officer and the driver. Their presence must have no influence on the meter

reading.

5. The microphone must be located 1.2 metres above the test site surface and at

a distance of 7.5 meters.

6. The sound level meter is to be set to A-weighted frequency response and fast

time response and set to record the maximum noise level during each drive-

by event.

7. Measurements must be made on unladen vehicles.

8. The tyres of the vehicle must be the correct size and must be inflated to the

correct pressure(s) for the vehicle in its unladen condition.

9. The engine must be brought to its normal operating conditions as regards

temperatures, tuning, fuel, sparking plugs, carburettor(s), etc. as appropriate,

prior to testing.

10. If the vehicle is equipped with devices which are not necessary for its

propulsion, but which are used whilst the vehicle is in service, those devices

must be in operation in accordance with the specifications of the

manufacturer.

11. Non-integer decibel readings are to be rounded downwards to the nearest

whole decibel.

Interferences 8. While the vehicle is being tested, any ancillary equipment, such as






9. No person other than the testing officer and any occupants of the vehicle or,

in the case of a motor cycle, the rider, must be within 1 meter of the

microphone.

10. Proper safety precautions must be observed when measuring sound pressure

emission level. Refer to the Safety, Health and Environmental Management

Program (SHEMP) Procedures and Policy Manual and any pertinent site-

specific Health and Safety Plans (HASP) for guidelines on safety precautions.

These guidelines should be used to complement the judgment of an

experienced professional. Address chemicals that pose specific toxicity or

safety concerns and follow any other relevant requirements, as appropriate.

Quality

Control

The measurements must be made in the open air where the ambient noise level is at

least 10 dB(A) below the noise level being measured.

5.AMBIENT AIR

The Air pointer R consists of the base unit and depending on the configuration of several gas modules

plus a meteorology and communication unit. The base unit includes housing with pump, an air

conditioner and a data logger (RDPP) plus software and two Ethernet 10/100 MBit/s Interfaces.

Depending on the configuration of your Airpointer R, several modules (SO2, O3, NOx, CO, particle,

H2S, TDS (traffic data sensor), electrochemical and VOC analyzer) can be built in to measure various

pollutants in ambient air. Refer to Section 5.5 version 2.11 T for the location of the SO2, O3, NOx, or

CO module.

Additionally an internal calibration control (ISM - Internal Span Module) can be installed for the

SO2, O3, NOx, or CO Module on the respective module. The specifications and further information of

the additional sensors and modules are given in the respective chapters of Air Pointer manual version

2.11 T. SO2, NOx, O3, CO sensors use the respective EU reference method.

Meteorology (chapter 12 version 2.11 T)

– Wind speed

– Wind direction

– Ambient temperature, pressure, relative humidity, CO2, precipitation (hail, rain)

Communication (chapter 6 version 2.11 T)

– GPRS modem

– Wireless LAN router

– any other TCP/IP based system

ISM (Internal Span Module) (chapter 11 version 2.11 T)

VOC module

H2S module

TDS - Traffic Data Sensor

Electrochemical Analyzer

Indoor Air Quality Kits

Note: For this section refer to the Airpointer manual version 2.11 T

6. TYPES OF SAMPLING (GRAB, COMPOSITE, INTEGRATED)

a. Grab Sampling

Scope Collection of Grab Samples directly into sample bottles or containers for the

purposes of surface water and/or stormwater sampling and analysis.



Principle A sample collected at a particular time and place can represent only the

composition of the source at that time and place. This involves manual sampling

and minimal equipment but may be unduly costly and time-consuming for routine

or large-scale sampling programs. ‘Grab samples’ are simple scoops of the water or

wastewater being sampled and are appropriate where conditions are constant or

well mixed and slow to change. Care should always be taken that a grab sample is

representative of the whole, and should be taken from well-mixed areas on all

occasions.

Apparatus Sample bottles: 1 litre or 2 ½ litre new or autoclaved PVC bottles to be used

for all samples taken except samples taken for bacteriological, oil based or

solvent analysis.

Sampling hand-pump with extension tube – to be used for depth sampling at

low flow. Otherwise a sampling beaker (250ml, 500ml or 1000ml) with

screw-in extension rods to be used for depth sampling with sufficient flow.

Manhole lifters

Markers to be used to mark Identification on sample bottles

Disposable gloves

Procedure 1 Qualified authorised EPA personnel must take all samples. Sampling must be

carried out taking due care to avoid personal risk or injury arising from the

nature of the sample itself or the location of the sample point.

2 Sample bottles/containers must be clearly labelled and identified. The

time/date must be recorded together will all relevant details of location and

sampling conditions that may be present at time of sampling, e.g. weather

conditions.

3 Sample bottles must be securely sealed following sampling and stored

securely for safe transport to the laboratory in cooler boxes where necessary.

4 Samples will be analysed within 24 hours of sample collection, as a general

rule; however, there may be specific requirements for particular tests. (The

relevant SOP should be referred to in all cases in the sampling form)

Interferences Heavy rainfall dilutes effluent discharging from treatment plants that are not

housed. Flow into sewage treatment plants increases greatly when there is

heavy rainfall, particularly in towns where the surface water flows to the

sewers rather than to the streams/rivers.

Care should be taken to avoid gross solids and to avoid disturbing sediment

or materials adhering to surfaces of pipes, chambers, channels or

watercourses.

Reference Environmental research unit – Parameters of water quality.

Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 19th

Edition 1995.

b. Composite Sampling

Scope Collection of Composite Samples directly into sample bottles or containers for the

purposes of surface water and/or storm water sampling and analysis.

Principle Composite samples are either amalgamated or made up of smaller sub samples, and

can be prepared in two ways. Automatic samplers can eliminate human errors in

manual sampling, reduce labor costs, provide the means for more frequent



sampling, and are used increasingly.

The simplest form is time-related composites, which are made up of sub samples of

equal volume taken at specific time intervals e.g. sub samples every hour

composited to make a single daily sample. A composite sample representing a 24hr

period is considered standard for most determinations. Under other circumstances,

however, a composite representing a longer time period, or a shorter time period

may be preferable. The other form is flow proportional sampling, which requires a

purpose-designed sampler. These units take samples of wastewater proportional to

the flow and are usually linked to an automatic flow meter. This latter form of

sampling is extremely accurate and can be used to establish the total wastewater

load. Because of its accuracy, flow proportional composite sampling is preferable.

Apparatus Sample bottles: 1 litre or 2 ½ litre new or autoclaved PVC bottles to be used

for all samples taken except samples taken for bacteriological, oil based or

solvent analysis.

Sampling hand-pump with extension tube – to be used for depth sampling at

low flow. Otherwise a sampling beaker (250ml, 500ml or 1000ml) with

screw-in extension rods to be used for depth sampling with sufficient flow.

Manhole lifters

Markers to be used to mark Identification on sample bottles

Disposable gloves

Procedure 1 Qualified authorised EPA personnel must take all samples. Sampling must be

carried out taking due care to avoid personal risk or injury arising from the

nature of the sample itself or the location of the sample point.

2 Sample bottles/containers must be clearly labelled and identified. The

time/date must be recorded together will all relevant details of location and

sampling conditions that may be present at time of sampling, e.g. weather

conditions.

3 Sample bottles must be securely sealed following sampling and stored

securely for safe transport to the laboratory in cooler boxes where necessary.

4 Samples will be analysed within 24 hours of sample collection, as a general

rule; however, there may be specific requirements for particular tests. (The

relevant SOP should be referred to in all cases in the sampling form)

Interferences Heavy rainfall dilutes effluent discharging from treatment plants that are not

housed. Flow into sewage treatment plants increases greatly when there is

heavy rainfall, particularly in towns where the surface water flows to the

sewers rather than to the streams/rivers.

Care should be taken to avoid gross solids and to avoid disturbing sediment

or materials adhering to surfaces of pipes, chambers, channels or

watercourses.

Reference Environmental research unit – Parameters of water quality.

Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 19th

Edition 1995.

Section 2


For Testing and Analysis

Section 2 of Chapter 2 Standard Operating Procedures for Testing and Analysis


Section 2

Standard Operating Procedures for Testing

and Analysis EPA personnel are required to analyze environmental samples of the types mentioned below and thus

require SOPs for testing and analysis for the following categories:

1. Organics/Physiochemical (except metals)

2. Ambient Air and Gaseous Emissions

3. Heavy Metals

4. Microbiological Analysis

Note: Occupational health and safety considerations should be made before proceeding with

laboratory procedures.

Following are descriptions of testing and analysis procedures to allow the laboratory personnel to

analyze the composition and properties of environmental samples.

1. ORGANICS/PHYSIOCHEMICAL

Sr. No. Parameter

i. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS)

ii. Total Suspended Solids (TSS)

iii. pH

iv. Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD)

v. Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)

vi. Chlorides (Cl-)

vii. Free Chlorine (Cl2)

viii. Sulfide (S-2

)

ix. Ammonia (NH3)

x. Fluoride (F-)

xi. Cyanide (CN-) total

i. Standard Operating Procedure for Total Dissolved Solids (TDS)

Scope This method describes the determination of Total Dissolved Solids in

water/wastewater samples.

Principle A well-mixed sample is filtered through a standard glass fiber filter and the filtrate

is evaporated to dryness in a weighed dish and dried to a constant weight at 180C.

The increase in the dish weight represents the total dissolved solids.

Apparatus/

Reagents

Evaporating Dish, 100mL capacity made of porcelain.

Desiccator, provided with a desiccant containing a color indicator of moisture

concentration (silica gel beads with blue indicator).

Drying oven for operation at 103 to 105C.

Analytical balance.

Magnetic stirrer with TFE stirring bar.

Wide bore pipets.

Glass fibre filter disks without organic binder (Millipore type AP40), 47mm



diameter.

Filtration assembly containing membrane filter funnel, fritted disk, clamp,

suction flask etc.

Drying oven for operation at 180 ± 2C.

Procedure 1. Heat clean evaporating dish 180 + 2C for 1 hour in the oven. Store in a

desiccator until needed. Weigh immediately before use.

2. Choose sample volume to yield between 2.5 and 200mg dried residue. If

more than 10 minutes are required to complete filtration, decrease sample

volume.

3. Stir sample with a magnetic stirrer.

4. Pipet the measured volume onto the glass fiber filter with applied vacuum.

5. Wash with successive 10mL volumes of reagent water. Allow complete

drainage between washings.

6. Continue suction for about three minutes after filtration is complete.

7. Transfer total filtrate and washings to the evaporating dish.

8. Evaporate to dryness in a drying oven.

9. If necessary, add successive portions to the same dish.

10. Dry evaporated sample in an oven at 180 ± 2C for at least 1 hour.

11. Cool in a desiccator to balance temperature and weigh.

12. Repeat the drying, cooling, desiccating and weighing cycle until successive

weightings do not differ by more than 0.5mg, or 4% of previous weight

whichever is less.

Calculations

& Report (mg) TDS/L =

(A − B) ∗ 1000

sample vol (mL)

Where,

A = weight of dried residue + dish in mg

B = weight of dish in mg

Quality

Control

Analyze at least 10% of all samples in duplicate. Duplicate determinations should

agree within 5% of their average weight.

Reference APHA Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater 21st Edition

Method 2540C – Total Dissolved Solids Dried at 180C.

ii. Standard Operating Procedure for Total Suspended Solids (TSS)

Scope This method describes the determination of total suspended solids in water

Samples.

Principle A well-mixed sample is filtered through a weighed standard and the residue

retained on the filter is dried to constant weight at 103 - 105°C. Increase in the

weight of the filter represents total suspended solids.

Apparatus/

Reagents

Desiccator, provided with a desiccant containing a color indictor of moisture.

Drying oven for operation at 103 to 105C.

Analytical balance

Magnetic stirrer with TFE stirring bar

Wide bore pipets

Graduated cylinder



Low form beaker

Glass fiber filter disks without organic binder (Millipore type AP40) 47mm

circles

Filtration assembly containing membrane filter funnel, fritted disk, clamp,

suction flask etc.

Aluminum weighing dishes

Procedure 1. Choose sample volume to yield between 2.5 and 200mg dried residue. If

volume selected does not provide minimum yield, increase sample size upto

1L. If complete filtration takes more than 10 minutes, decrease sample

volume.

2. Pre-weigh the filter.

3. Assemble filtration apparatus and start suction.

4. Wet filter with a small volume of reagent water to seat it.

5. Stir sample with a magnetic stirrer at a speed to sheer larger particles to

obtain a practically uniform particle size.

6. While stirring, pipet a measured volume onto the seated glass fiber filter.

7. For homogenous samples, pipet from the approximate midpoint of the

container, but not in the vortex. Choose a point midway between wall and

vortex.

8. Wash filter with successive 10mL volumes of reagent grade water, allowing

complete drainage between washings.

9. Additional washings may be required for samples with high dissolved solids.

10. Continue suction after 3 minutes the filtration is complete.

11. Carefully remove filter from filtration apparatus and transfer to the aluminum

weighing dish.

12. Dry for at least 1 hour at 103 to 105C in an oven, cool in a desiccator to

balance temperature and weigh.

13. Repeat drying, cooling, desiccating and weighing cycle until successive

weighing differ by not more than 0.4mg, or 4% of previous sample weight,

whichever is less.

Calculations

& Report (mg) TDS/L =

(A − B) ∗ 1000

sample vol (mL)

Where,

A = weight of dried residue + filter in mg

B = weight of filter in mg

Quality

Control

Analyze at least 10% of all samples in duplicate. Duplicate determinations should

agree within 5% of their average weight.


Method 2540C – Total Suspended Solids Dried at 130-105C.

iii. Standard Operating Procedure for pH

Scope This method describes the determination of pH Value of water/wastewater samples.

Principle The basic principle of electrometric pH measurement is determination of the

activity of the hydrogen ions by potentiometric measurement. It is a measure of

intensity of the acidic or basic character of a solution at a particular temperature



defined as – log [H+].

Apparatus/

Reagents

Glass Beaker 250 ml

pH meter

Calibration buffers pH 7.00, pH 4.00, pH 10.0.

Saturated Potassium Chloride solution

Procedure 1. Select at least two pH Buffers solutions covering the desired measurement

range.

2. Clean the pH probe (bulb) with distilled water as per manufacturer

instructions.

3. Immerse the probe in first buffer of lower value (say 4.00 pH), record the

temperature and let stabilize its digital pH read. Calibrate its pH at 4.00 in the

pH-Meter memory.

4. Immerse the probe, now, in buffer of higher value (7.00 pH) and let stabilize

the pH read at 7.00. Calibrate this read on pH meter.

5. After calibration, verify any one of the applied buffer solutions with pH

meter.

6. Now immerse the probe in samples taken in a beaker one by one, record the

temperature and let stabilize its digital pH read and record the results of every

sample pH on pH bench sheet. Clean and dry the probe after every

measurement.

7. Verify pH meter calibration with one of the standard pH solutions after at

least five measurements and also at the end of measurements. Record

verification on the pH bench sheet.

8. If the verification value of pH buffer solutions varies by more than 0.1 pH

units, stop the measurements and recalibrate the pH meter.

Calculations

& Report

Read direct from pH meter.

Notes After using, keep pH electrode wet by inserting the electrode in saturated Potassium

chloride solution.

Reference APHA Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater 21st

Edition Method 4500-H+ B (Electrometric Method).

pH meter operation manual/Work Instructions for pH meter.

iv. Standard Operating Procedure for Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD)

Scope This method describes the determination of Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD5) at

20C of waste water, industrial effluents & surface water expressed as mg/L O2.

Principle Sample is placed in a closed system of a BOD bottle, and stirred continuously.

Bacteria present in the sample consume oxygen which causes air pressure to drop

inside the bottle. Pressure drop is measured and is related to oxygen consumption,

hence BOD of sample.

Apparatus/

Reagents

BOD Incubator (Lovibond)

pH meter

BOD bottles Lovibond-oxydirect

BOD measuring device with sensors, bottle racks, seal cups, magnetic stirring

rods, stirring system drive and stirring system controllers



Nitrification inhibitor (ATH). Supplied by manufacturer.

Potassium Hydroxide solution 45%. Supplied by manufacturer.

Overflow measurement flasks, 157mL and 428mL, supplied by manufacturer.

Distilled Water.

Phosphate Buffer Solution 1.5 N: Dissolve 207g sodium dihydrogen

phosphate, NaH2PO4.H2O, in water. Neutralize to pH 7.2 with 6N KOH and

dilute to 1 L.

Ammonium Chloride Solution, 0.71N: Dissolve 38.2 g ammonium chloride,

NH4Cl, in water. Neutralize to pH 7.0 with KOH. Dilute to 1.0 L; 1mL =

10mgN.

Calcium Chloride Solution, 0.25N: Dissolve 27.7 g CaCl2 in water and dilute

to 1L; 1mL = 10mg Ca.

Magnesium Sulphate Solution, 0.41N: Dissolve 101g MgSO4.7H2O in water

and dilute to 1L; 1mL = 10mg Mg.

Ferric Chloride Solution, 0.018N: Dissolve 4.84g FeCl3. 6H2O in water and

dilute to 1L; 1mL = 1.0mg Fe.

Potassium hydroxide solution, 6N: Dissolve 336g KOH in about 700mL

water, and dilute to 1L. Add KOH to water slowly with mixing to prevent

heat buildup.

Acid Solution, 1N: Add 28mL conc. H2SO4 to about 700mL water. Dilute to

1L.

Alkali Solution, 1N: Add 40g NaOH to 700mL water. Dilute to 1L.

Glucose – Glutamic Acid Solution: Dry reagent grade glucose and reagent

grade glutamic acid at 103C for 1h. Add 15.0 g glucose and 15.0 g glutamic

acid to distilled water and dilute to 1L. Neutralize to pH 7.0 using KOH

solution. Store upto 1 week at 4C (in refrigerator).

Sodium sulfite solution, 0.025N: Dissolve 1.575g Na2SO3 in about 800mL

water. Dilute to 1L. Prepare as needed.

Seed Suspension: Use supernatant from settled domestic wastewater, un-

disinfected effluent or receiving water from below the point of discharge.

Procedure 1. If the sample contains large settle-able or floatable solids, homogenize it with

a blender or stir thoroughly so as to get a representative test portion.

2. Check sample pH with a pH meter. If necessary, adjust pH with either H2SO4

or NaOH of such strength so as not to change the volume of sample by more

than 0.5%.

3. If residual chlorine is present, destroy it by either of the procedures below:

Let the sample stand in light for 1 to 2 hours.

If residual chlorine still persists, take a suitable volume of sample

(say 50mL) in a conical flask. Add 10mL of 1+1 acetic acid. Add

10mL of 10% potassium iodide solution. Titrate with 0.025N

Na2SO3 solution to the starch-iodine end point. Determine the

proportional volume of this Na2SO3 solution required to neutralize

the residual chlorine in the desired volume of the sample. Add this

calculated volume or amount of Na2SO3 solution to the desired

volume of sample, mix, and after 10-20 minute, recheck for residual

chlorine. Proceed with such de-chlorinated samples with seeding



step.

4. Bring samples and dilution water to desired temperature (20 ± 1C) before

making dilutions or transferring to BOD bottles.

5. From the Table 2.1, using expected BOD5 value of sample (take 80% of

COD value as a guide), use the volume of sample mentioned against each

range of expected BOD5 value.

6. Add sufficient ammonium chloride, 0.71N solution (10mg N/mL) and

sufficient phosphate buffer solution to give a COD:N:P ratio of 100:5:1. For

this, calculate the volume of ammonium chloride solution required by the

following formula; = COD (in mg/L) X Volume of Sample (in mL)/200,000,

and add it to the sample.

7. Calculate the volume of phosphate buffer solution required by the following

formula; = COD (in mg/L) X Volume of Sample (in mL)/50,000, and add it

to the sample.

8. Add specified volume of each of calcium, magnesium and ferric solutions to

the sample.

9. If seed culture is to be added, use sufficient volume of seed culture to affect

required oxygen uptake. However, its quantity should not exceed so as to

deplete oxygen at a rate greater than 10% that of sample. The volume of seed

solution mentioned in the table may be used.

10. Dilute each preparation to the final volume mentioned in the table. Mix well.

11. Prepare a seed sample to measure the oxygen uptake of seed solution in the

same manner as for any other sample, as provided in the table.

12. Measure the representative portion of sample volume precisely using

appropriate overflow measurement flask as per above table, and pour the

sample in the sample bottle. A funnel may be used.

13. If nitrification inhibitor is to be added, use its quantity as mentioned in the

table.

14. Add a clean magnetic stirring rod to each sample bottle.

15. Add 3-4 drops of 45% potassium hydroxide solution to the seal gasket (to

absorb carbon dioxide produced). Insert the sealed gasket in the neck of the

bottle. Don’t allow sample to come in contact with potassium hydroxide

solution. Neither use any grease or other materials for sealing.

16. Place the BOD sensor on the sample bottle and tighten carefully. Place the

BOD bottle, with the sensor screwed in position, into the bottle rack.

17. Start the measurement process according to manufacturer’s instructions. Be

sure to select the appropriate BOD range (0 – 40 or 0 – 400 mg/L), correct

sample volume (428 or 157mL) and measurement duration (5 days).

18. Check the equipment daily for any deviation of the daily BOD pattern as

provided in manufacturer’s instructions. Apply corrective action if anything is

not as expected.

Calculations

& Report

After five days of incubation, note down the reading of BOD in mg/L of incubated

sample directly from the instrument. This is the measured oxygen uptake in seeded

sample in mg/L. To calculate the actual oxygen uptake of sample (with added seed

solution), and of seed solution (Seed Blank) itself, in mg, use following formula;

Oxygen uptake (mg) = Observed BOD ∗final vol

1000



Calculate the value of BOD5 by the following formula;

C =(A − B(SA/SB)) ∗ 1000

NA

Where,

C = corrected oxygen uptake of the sample, mg/L (BOD5)

A = measured oxygen uptake in seeded sample, in mg

B = measured oxygen uptake in seed control, mg

SA = volume of seed in sample A, in mL

SB = volume of seed in sample B (Seed Blank), in mL

NA = volume of undiluted sample in sample A, in mL.

Quality

Control

1. Run quality control samples at least once in a month.

2. For a “Test Solution”, add to 800mL water, 10mL glucose-glutamic acid

solution, 6mL phosphate buffer, 2mL each of ammonium chloride solution,

magnesium sulfate solution, calcium chloride solution and ferric chloride

solution. Add nitrification inhibitor according to manufacturer’s instructions.

Add sufficient seed as for other samples (25mL supernatant primary

effluent/L of test solution is a good choice). Dilute to 1L. Adjust temperature

to 20 ± 1C. Test can be performed in three replicates.

3. For a “Seed Blank”, dilute 500mL or more of the seed solution to 800mL

with water. Add same amounts of buffer, nutrients and nitrification inhibitor

as in the test solution above, dilute to 1L with water and adjust temperature to

20 ± 1C. Prepare three replicates and prepare proportionally higher volumes

of every solution, if required.

4. Prepare BOD bottles for test solution replicates and blank seed replicates

using 157mL and 428mL overflow bottles respectively. Measure 5-Day BOD

of the test solution and blank seed in the usual manner.

5. Acceptance criteria: Seed corrected oxygen uptake of test solution after 5 day

incubation should be 260 ± 30 mg/L. If the measured value is outside this

range, repeat the measurement using fresh seed culture and investigate the

cause of the problem.

Notes Keep samples at or below 4C from the time of collection and start analysis within

24 hours of sampling.

Reference APHA Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater 21st

Edition Method 5210-D (Respirometric Method)

Lovibond BOD Oxidirect Operator’s manual

Table 2.1: Volume of sample against each range of expected BOD5 value

Expected

BOD5

Value

(mg/L)

Required

Sample

Volume

(mL)

Volume of

each of Ca,

Mg and Fe

Solutions

(mL)

Suggested

Volume of

Seed

Solution (if

Required)

(mL)

Final

Volume

(mL)

Overflow

Flask to be

used (mL)

Drops of

Nitrification

Inhibitor

(ATH), if

used, in

BOD Bottle

Seed

Solution

400 1.0 - 500 428 10

<50 400 1.0 10 500 428 10



50 – 100 200 1.0 10 500 428 10

100 – 200 100 1.0 10 500 428 10

200 – 500 200 0.5 5 250 157 5

500 – 1000 100 0.5 5 250 157 5

1000 –

2000

50 0.5 5 250 157 5

2000 –

4000

25 0.5 5 250 157 5

v. Standard Operating Procedure for Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)

Scope The amount of a specified oxidant that reacts with the sample under controlled

conditions. The quantity of oxidant consumed is expressed in terms of its oxygen

equivalence.

Principle Most types of organic matter are oxidized by a boiling mixture of chromic and

sulfuric acids. A sample is refluxed in strongly acid solution with a known excess

of potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O7). After digestion, the remaining unreduced

K2Cr2O7 is titrated with ferrous ammonium sulfate to determine the amount of

K2Cr2O7 consumed and the oxidizable matter is calculated in terms of oxygen

equivalent. Keep ratios of reagent weights, volumes, and strengths constant when

sample volumes other than 50 mL are used. The standard 2-h reflux time may be

reduced if it has been shown that a shorter period yields the same results. Some

samples with very low COD or with highly heterogeneous solids content may need

to be analyzed in replicate to yield the most reliable data. Results are further

enhanced by reacting a maximum quantity of dichromate, provided that some

residual dichromate remains.

Apparatus/

Reagents

Reflux apparatus

500 or 250-mL Erlenmeyer flasks with ground-glass

Jacket Liebig

Condenser ground-glass joint

Hot plate

Blender

Pipets

Standard potassium dichromate solution, 0.0417 M/0.2500 N: Dissolve

12.259 g K2Cr2O7, primary standard grade, previously dried at 150C for 2

hours, in distilled water and dilute to 1000 mL.

Sulfuric acid reagent: Dissolve 5.5 g Ag2SO4 per kg of H2SO4. Let Stand 1

or 2 days to dissolve.

Ferroin indicator solution: 1.485 g 1, 10 phenanthroline monohydrate 0.695

g FeSO4.7H2Oin distill water and dilute to 100 mL.

Standard ferrous ammonium sulfate (FAS) titrant, approx. 0.25 M:

Dissolve 98g Fe(NH4)2(SO4)2.6H2O in distill water. Add 20 mL H2SO4, cool,

and dilute to 1000 mL. Standardize this solution against K2Cr2O7 as follows:

Dilute 25.0 mL standard K2Cr2O7 to about 100 mL. Add 30 mL conc.

Sulfuric Acid and cool. Titrate with FAS titrant using 0.10 or 0.15 mL (2 or



3 drops ) of Ferroin indicator.

Mercuric sulfate HgSO4 crystal or powder

Potassium hydrogen phthalate (KHP) standard, HOOCC6H4COOK:

Lightly crush and then dry KHP to constant weight at 110C Dissolve 0.425 g

in distilled water and dilute to 1000 mL. KHP has a theoretical COD of

0.001176 g O2/mg and this solution has a theoretical COD of 500 µg O2/mL.

This solution is stable when refrigerated, but not indefinitely. Be alert to

development of visible biological growth. If practical, prepare and transfer

solution under sterile conditions. Weekly preparation usually is satisfactory.

Procedure 1. Treatment of sample with COD of>50 mg O2/L: Blend sample if necessary

and pipet 50 mL into a 500 mL refluxing flask. For a sample with COD

of>900 mg O2/L, use a small portion diluted to 50 mL.

2. Add 1 g HgSO4 several glass beads and very slowly add 5.0 mL sulfuric acid

reagent with mixing to dissolve mercuric sulfate. Cool while mixing to avoid

possible loss of volatile material.

3. Add 25.0 mL 0.25 N potassium dichromate solution and mix. Attach flask to

condenser and turn on cooling water.

4. Add remaining sulfuric acid reagent (70 mL) through open end of condenser.

Continue swirling and mixing while adding sulfuric acid reagent.

5. Note: Mix reflux mixture thoroughly before applying heat to prevent local

heating of flask bottom and a possible blowout of flask contents.

6. Cover open end of condenser with a small beaker to prevent foreign material

from entering refluxing mixture and reflux for 2 h. Cool and wash down

condenser with distilled water.

7. Disconnect reflux condenser and dilute mixture to about twice its volume

with distilled water.

8. Cool to room temperature and titrate excess K2Cr2O7 with FAS, using 0.10 to

0.15 mL (2 to 3 drops) ferroin indicator. Although the quantity of ferroin

indicator is not critical, use the same volume for all titrations.

9. Take as the end point of the titration the first sharp color change from blue-

green to reddish brown that persists for 1 min or longer.

10. Duplicate determinations should agree within 5% of their average.

11. The blue-green may reappear. In the same manner, reflux and titrate a blank

containing the reagents and a volume of distilled water equal to that of

sample.

Calculations

& Report COD as mg/L =

(A − B) ∗ M ∗ 8,000

sample vol (mL)

Where,

A = mL FAS used for blank

B = mL FAS used for sample

M = Molarity of FAS

8000 = milli equivalent weight of Oxygen * 1000 mL/L

vi. Standard Operating Procedure for Chlorides (Cl-)

Scope This method describes the determination of Chlorides in water/wastewater.

Principle In a neutral or slightly alkaline solution, potassium chromate can indicate the end



point of the silver nitrate titration of chloride. Silver chloride is precipitated

quantitatively before red silver chromate is formed.

Apparatus/

Reagents

Erlenmeyer flask 250 ml

Burette 50 ml

Potassium chromate indicator solution: Dissolve 50 g of K2CrO4 in a little

distilled water. Add AgNO3 solution until a definite red precipitate is formed.

Let stand for 12 h, filter & dilute to 1 L with distilled water.

Standard AgNO3 0.0141N (Approx.): Dissolve 2.395 g of AgNO3 in distilled

water and dilute to 1000ml. Standardize against sodium chloride as given in

procedure for sample titration. Store in a brown bottle.

Standard Sodium chloride, 0.0141 N: Dissolve 824 mg NaCl (dried at 140°C)

in distilled water and dilute to 1000 ml. (1.00mL = 500µg Cl-)

Special Reagents for removal of interference;

Aluminum Hydroxide Suspension: Dissolve 125g Aluminum Potassium

sulphate or aluminum ammonium sulphate in 1L distilled water. Warm to

60°C & add 55 ml conc. NH4OH slowly with stirring. Let stand for 1 h.

transfer to a large bottle & wash precipitate by successive additions, with

thorough mixing & decanting with distilled water, until free from chloride.

Suspension occupies the volume of approximately 1L.

Phenolphthalein indicator solution.

Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH), 1N.

Sulphuric Acid, H2SO4, 1N.

Hydrogen peroxide, H2O2 (30%).

Procedure 1. Use a 100mL sample or a suitable portion diluted to 100mL.

2. If the sample is highly colored, add 3mL Al(OH)3 suspension, mix, let settle

and filter.

3. If sulfide, sulfite, or thiosulfate is present, add 1mL H2O2 and stir for 1 min.

4. Check sample pH. If not in the range of 7 to 10, adjust with H2SO4 or NaOH

solution. Determine the volume of alkali or acid needed to bring pH in range

for a portion of sample. Discard sample portion, and add a calculated volume

of acid or alkali, as required, to a fresh portion of sample.

5. Add 1.0mL K2CrO4 indicator solution.

6. Titrate with standard AgNO3 titrant to a pinkish yellow end point.

7. Standardize AgNO3 titrant and establish reagent blank value by the titration

method above. A blank of 0.2 to 0.3mL may be obtained.

Calculations

& Report (mg)Cl/L =

(A − B) ∗ N ∗ 35,450

sample vol (mL)

Where,

A = mL titration for sample

B = mL titration for blank

N = Normality of AgNO3


Method 4500 Cl-B – Argentometric Method.



vii. Standard Operating Procedure for Free Chlorine

Scope This method describes the determination of free chlorine in water Samples.

Method 1 Iodometric Method

Principle Chlorine will liberate free iodine from potassium iodide (KI) solutions at pH 8 or

less. The liberated iodine is titrated with a standard solution of sodium thiosulfate

(Na2S2O3) with starch as the indicator. Titrate at pH 3 to 4 because the reaction is

not stoichiometric at neutral pH due to partial oxidation of thiosulfate to sulfate.

Apparatus/

Reagents

Acetic acid, conc. (glacial).

Potassium iodide, KI, crystals.

Standard sodium thiosulfate, 0.01 N: Dissolve 2.5 g Na2S2O3⋅ 5H2O in freshly

boiled water. Store for 2 weeks. Add 4g sodium borate and 10mg mercuric

iodide/L solution. Dilute solution to 1000mL. Standardize against potassium

dichromate. Standard titrant is equivalent to 354.5µg Cl as Cl2/1.00mL.

Standard 0.01 N K2Cr2O7: Dissolve 490.4 mg K2Cr2O7, of primary standard

quality, in distilled water and dilute to 1000mL to give a 0.0100N solution.

Store in a glass stoppered bottle.

Starch indicator solution: To 5 g starch (potato, arrowroot, or soluble), add a

little cold water and grind in a mortar to a thin paste. Pour into 1 L of boiling

distilled water, stir, and let settle overnight. Use clear supernatant. Preserve

with 1.25 g salicylic acid/L starch solution.

Procedure Select a sample volume requiring no more than 20mL 0.01N Na2S2O3 and no

less than 0.2mL for the starch-iodide end point. 250 or 500mL sample is

appropriate for most analyses. Use 10mL or a microburette for titration.

Place 5 mL acetic acid, or enough to reduce the pH to between 3.0 and 4.0 in

the flask, add about 1 g KI estimated on a spatula. Add sample into the flask

and stir to mix.

Titrate against 0.01N Na2S2O3 from the burette until the yellow color of the

liberated iodine almost is discharged.

Add 1 mL starch solution and titrate until blue color is discharged.

Prepare a blank by using same volume of distilled water as for sample, add

5mL acetic acid, 1g KI, and 1mL starch solution.

If a blue color develops titrate with 0.01N Na2SO3 to disappearance of blue

color and record result B as negative.

If no blue color occurs, titrate with 0.0282N iodine solution until a blue color

appears. Back titrate with 0.01N Na2SO3 and record the difference B, which

is now positive.

Subtract the blank titration from the sample titration in calculation.

Calculations

& Report (mg)Cl as Cl2/L =

(A ± B) ∗ N ∗ 35,450

sample vol (mL)

Where,


B = mL titration for blank (positive or negative)

N = Normality of Na2S2O3

Method 2 DPD Colorimetric Method



Principle Chlorine-containing samples are reacted with N, N-diethyl-p-phenylenediamine to

produce a color which can be measured by a spectrophotometer at 515nm. The

sample absorbance value is compared to a standard series curve to give total

chlorine content of sample.

Apparatus/

Reagents

Spectrophotometer, for use at 515nm and providing a light path of 1cm.

Phosphate buffer solution: Dissolve 24 g anhydrous Na2HPO4 and 46 g

anhydrous KH2PO4 in distilled water. Combine with 100 mL distilled water

in which 800 mg disodium ethylenediamine tetraacetate dihydrate (EDTA)

have been dissolved. Dilute to 1 L with distilled water. Add 20mg HgCl2 to

prevent mold growth.

N,N-Diethyl-p-phenylenediamine (DPD) indicator solution: Dissolve 1 g

DPD oxalate chlorine-free distilled water containing 8 mL 1 + 3 H2SO4 and

200 mg disodium EDTA. Make up to 1 L, store in a brown glass-stoppered

bottle in the dark, and discard when discolored. Periodically check solution

blank for absorbance and discard when absorbance at 515 nm exceeds

0.002/cm.

Chlorine water

Potassium iodide, KI, crystals.

Chlorine demand free water: Prepare from deionized water by adding

sufficient chlorine to give 5mg/L free chlorine. Let stand for 2 days. The

solution should contain at least 2mg/L free chlorine. If not, discard and obtain

further pure water until it passes this check. Remove remaining free chlorine

by placing container in sunlight or irradiating with an ultraviolet lamp. After

several hours, take sample, add KI, and measure total chlorine. Do not use

before all chlorine has been removed

Procedure 1. Prepare standard series by either of the following two methods.

2. Standard series preparation method 1.

Standardize about 100mg/L chlorine water as follows: Place 2mL acetic

acid and 10 to 25mL chlorine demand free water in a flask. Add about 1 g

KI. Measure into the flask a suitable volume of chlorine solution. In

choosing a convenient volume, note that 1mL 0.025N Na2SO3 titrant is

equivalent to 0.9mg chlorine. (100mL may be appropriate). Titrate with

standardized 0.025N Na2SO3 titrant until the yellow iodine colour almost

disappears. Add 1 to 2mL starch indicator solution and continue titration

till disappearance of blue color. Determine the blank by adding identical

quantities of acid, KI, and starch indicator to a volume of chlorine demand

free water corresponding to the sample used for titration. Calculate the

chlorine concentration by using the formula;

(mg)Cl as Cl2/mL =(A ± B) ∗ N ∗ 35.45

sample vol (mL)

Where,


B = mL titration for blank (positive or negative)

N = Normality of Na2S2O3

Use chlorine free water and glassware to prepare standard solutions from

the standardized 100mg/L chlorine solution ranging from 0.05 to 4mg/L



chlorine as follows:

For about 0.05mg/L chlorine standard solution, dilute 1mL stock solution

to 100mL. (1.0mg/L standard solution). Further dilute 5mL of this solution

to 100mL. (0.05mg/L standard solution).

For about 0.1mL chlorine standard solution, dilute 10mL of 1mg/L

standard to 100mL.

For 2mg/L chlorine standard solution, dilute 2mL stock solution to 100mL.

For 4mg/L chlorine standard solution, dilute 4mL stock solution to 100mL.

Into five tubes, place 0.5mL phosphate buffer solution followed by 0.5mL

DPD indicator reagent each.

Add 10mL from each standard chlorine solution to one of the tubes with

through mixing.

Read in spectrophotometer at 515nm and record absorbance of each

standard solution.

3. Standard series preparation method 2.

Prepare a stock solution containing 891mg KMNO4/1000mL. Dilute

10.00mL stock solution to 100mL with distilled water in a volumetric flask.

(First Dilution). When 1mL of this solution is diluted to 100mL with

distilled water, a chlorine equivalent of 1.00mg/L is produced in the DPD

reaction. Prepare a series of standard solutions from the first dilution as

provided for in preparation of standard series method 1 above, ranging

from 0.05 to 4mg/L chlorine equivalent.

Into five tubes, place 0.5mL phosphate buffer solution followed by 0.5mL

DPD indicator reagent each.

Add 10mL from each standard chlorine solution to one of the tubes with

through mixing.

Read in spectrophotometer at 515nm and record absorbance of each

standard solution.

4. If the sample has expected chlorine concentration greater than 4mg/L, dilute

with chorine demand free water appropriately to bring sample concentration in

the measurement range of calibration standard solutions.

5. Place 0.5mL each of buffer solution and DPD indicator reagent in a test tube.

6. Add about 0.1g KI and mix.

7. Add 10mL sample and mix.

8. Read absorbance of this solution after 2minutes in spectrophotometer at

515nm.

9. Construct a calibration curve from the standard solution series, whichever is

employed, and from the absorbance of sample solution, compute the

concentration of sample solution from the calibration curve.

Calculations

& Report

From the calibration curve


Method 4500 Cl B – Iodometric Method I, and Method 4500 Cl G – DPD

Colorimetric Method.



viii. Standard Operating Procedure for Sulfide (S2-)

Scope This method describes the determination of Sulfide in water/waste water samples.

Principle Sulfides are measured iodometrically by back titration method. A know volume of

sample is taken into iodometric flask and acidified sample is oxidized with

standardized iodine solution. The un-reacted amount of Iodine solution is back

titrated with standardized sodium thiosulphate solution and reported as sulfide.

Apparatus/

Reagents

Glass bottles with stoppers: 500mL capacity

Zinc acetate solution: Dissolve 220g Zn(C2H3O2)2.2H2O in 870mL water;

this makes 1L solution.

Sodium hydroxide solution, NaOH, 6N.

Hydrochloric acid, HCl, 6N.

Standard iodine solution, 0.0250 N: Dissolve 20 to 25g KI in a little water

and add 3.2g iodine. After iodine has dissolved, dilute to 1000 mL and

standardize against 0.0250N Na2S2O3, using starch solution as indicator.

Standard sodium thiosulfate titrant: Dissolve 6.205 g Na2S2O3⋅5H2O in

distilled water. Add 1.5 mL 6N NaOH or 0.4 g solid NaOH and dilute to 1000

mL. Standardize with bi-iodate solution.

Standard potassium bi-iodate solution, 0.0021M: Dissolve 812.4 mg

KH(IO3)2 in distilled water and dilute to 1000 mL.

1. Standardization: Dissolve approximately 2 g KI, free from iodate, in an

erlenmeyer flask with 100 to 150 mL distilled water. Add 1 mL 6N

H2SO4 or a few drops of conc H2SO4 and 20.00 mL standard bi-iodate

solution. Dilute to 200 mL and titrate liberated iodine with thiosulfate

titrant, adding starch toward the end of titration, when a pale straw

color is reached.

2. When the solutions are of equal strength, 20.00 mL 0.025M Na2S2O3

should be required. If not, adjust the Na2S2O3 solution to 0.025M.

3. Starch: Dissolve 2 g laboratory-grade soluble starch and 0.2 g salicylic

acid, as a preservative, in 100 mL hot distilled water.

Procedure 1. Put 0.20 mL (4 drops) zinc acetate solution and 0.10 mL (2 drops) 6N NaOH

into a 100-mL glass bottle, fill with sample, and add 0.10 mL (2 drops) 6N

NaOH solution.

2. Stopper with no air bubbles under stopper and mix by rotating back and forth

vigorously about a transverse axis.

3. Add enough NaOH to raise the pH above 9. Let precipitate settle for 30 min.

The treated sample is relatively stable and can be held for several hours

except if much iron is present.

4. Collect precipitate on a glass fiber filter.

5. Return filter with precipitate to original bottle and add about 100 mL water.

6. Measure from a buret into a 500-mL flask an amount of iodine solution

estimated to be an excess over the amount of sulfide present.

7. Add distilled water, if necessary, to bring volume to about 20mL.

8. Add 2 mL 6N HCl.

9. Pour sample into flask, discharging sample under solution surface. If iodine

color disappears, add more iodine until color remains.



10. Back-titrate with Na2S2O3 solution, adding a few drops of starch solution as

end point is approached, and continuing until blue color disappears.

Calculations

& Report (mg)Cl/L =

[(A ∗ B) ∗ (C ∗ D)] ∗ 16,000

sample vol (mL)

Where,

A = mL Iodine solution

B = Normality of Iodine solution

C = mL Na2S2O3 solution

D = Normality of Na2S2O3 solution


Method 4500 – S2-

– C – Sample Pretreatment to Remove Interfering Substances or

to Concentrate the Sulfide, Method 4500 – S2-

– F - Iodometric Method.

ix. Standard Operating Procedure for Ammonia (NH3)

Scope This method is applicable to the measurement of NH3-N/L in potable and surface

waters and domestic and industrial wastes. High concentrations of dissolved ions

affect the measurement, but color and turbidity do not. Sample distillation is

necessary.

Principle The distillation and titration procedure is used especially for NH3-N concentrations

greater than 5 mg/L. Boric acid is used as the absorbent following distillation if the

distillate is to be titrated.

Apparatus/

Reagents

Distillation apparatus: Arrange a borosilicate glass flask of 800- to 2000-

mL capacity attached to a vertical condenser so that the outlet tip may be

submerged below the surface of the receiving acid solution. Use an all-

borosilicate-glass apparatus or one with condensing units constructed of

block tin or aluminum tubes.

pH meter

Ammonia-free water: Prepare by ion-exchange or distillation methods:

1. Ion exchange—Prepare ammonia-free water by passing distilled water

through an ion-exchange column containing a strongly acidic cation-

exchange resin mixed with a strongly basic anion-exchange resin. Select

resins that will remove organic compounds that interfere with the ammonia

determination. Some anion-exchange resins tend to release ammonia. If this

occurs, prepare ammonia-free water with a strongly acidic cation-exchange

resin. Regenerate the column according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Check ammonia-free water for the possibility of a high blank value.

2. Distillation—Eliminate traces of ammonia in distilled water by adding 0.1

mL conc H2SO4 to 1 L distilled water and redistilling. Alternatively, treat

distilled water with sufficient bromine or chlorine water to produce a free

halogen residual of 2 to 5 mg/ L and redistill after standing at least 1 h.

Discard the first 100 mL distillate. Check redistilled water for the

possibility of a high blank. It is very difficult to store ammonia-free water

in the laboratory without contamination from gaseous ammonia. However,

if storage is necessary, store in a tightly stoppered glass container to which

is added about 10 g ion-exchange resin (preferably a strongly acidic cation-

exchange resin)/L ammonia-free water. For use, let resin settle and decant



ammonia-free water. If a high blank value is produced, replace the resin or

prepare fresh ammonia-free water. Use ammonia-free distilled water for

preparing all reagents, rinsing, and sample dilution.

Borate buffer solution: Add 88 mL 0.1N NaOH solution to 500 mL

approximately 0.025M sodium tetraborate (Na2B4O7) solution (9.5 g

Na2B4O7⋅10 H2O/L) and dilute to 1 L.

Sodium hydroxide, 6N.

Dechlorinating reagent: Dissolve 3.5 g sodium thiosulfate (Na2S2O3⋅5H2O)

in water and dilute to 1 L. Prepare fresh weekly. Use 1 mL reagent to remove

1 mg/L residual chlorine in 500-mL sample.

Neutralization agent.

1) Sodium hydroxide, NaOH, 1N.

2) Sulfuric acid, H2SO4, 1N.

Absorbent solution, boric acid: Dissolve 20g H3BO3 in water and dilute to 1

L.

Indicating boric acid solution.

Sulfuric acid, 0.04N: Dilute 1.0 mL conc H2SO4 to 1 L

Procedure 1. Preparation of equipment: Add 500 mL water and 20 mL borate buffer,

adjust pH to 9.5 with 6N NaOH solution, and add to a distillation flask. Add a

few glass beads or boiling chips and use this mixture to steam out the

distillation apparatus until distillate shows no traces of ammonia.

2. Sample preparation: Use 500 mL dechlorinated sample or a known portion

diluted to 500mL with water. When NH3-N concentration is less than 100

µg/L, use a sample volume of 1000mL. Remove residual chlorine by adding,

at the time of collection, dechlorinating agent equivalent to the chlorine

residual. If necessary, neutralize to approximately pH 7 with dilute acid or

base, using a pH meter. Add 25 mL borate buffer solution and adjust to pH

9.5 with 6N NaOH using a pH meter.

3. Distillation: To minimize contamination, leave distillation apparatus

assembled after steaming out and until just before starting sample distillation.

Disconnect steaming-out flask and immediately transfer sample flask to

distillation apparatus. Distill at a rate of 6 to 10 mL/min with the tip of the

delivery tube below the surface of acid receiving solution. Collect distillate in

a 500-mL erlenmeyer flask containing 50 mL indicating boric acid solution

for titrimetric method. Distill ammonia into 50 mL 0.04N H2SO4 for the

ammonia-selective electrode method and for the phenate method. Collect at

least 200 mL distillate. Lower distillation receiver so that the end of the

delivery tube is free of contact with the liquid and continue distillation during

the last minute or two to cleanse condenser and delivery tube. Dilute to 500

mL with water. When the phenate method is used for determining NH3-N,

neutralize distillate with 1N NaOH solution.

4. Ammonia determination: Determine ammonia by the titrimetric method

(C), the ammonia-selective electrode methods (D and E), or the phenate

methods (F and G).

Calculations

& Report

(mg)NH3 − N/L =(A − B) ∗ 280

sample vol (mL)



Where,

A = volume of H2SO4 titrated for sample, mL, and

B = volume of H2SO4 titrated for blank, mL.

Interferences Glycine, urea, glutamic acid, cyanates, and acetamide hydrolyze very slowly in

solution on standing but, of these, only urea and cyanates will hydrolyze on

distillation at pH of 9.5. Hydrolysis amounts to about 7% at this pH for urea and

about 5% for cyanates. Volatile alkaline compounds such as hydrazine and amines

will influence titrimetric results. Residual chlorine reacts with ammonia; remove by

sample pretreatment. If a sample is likely to contain residual chlorine, immediately

upon collection, treat with dechlorinating agent

Reference Wagner, E.C. 1940. Titration of ammonia in the presence of boric acid. Ind.

Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed. 12:711.

APHA Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater 20th

Edition Method 4500 – NH3.

x. Standard Operating Procedure for Fluoride (F-)

Scope A fluoride concentration of approximately 1.0 mg/L in drinking water effectively

reduces dental caries without harmful effects on health. Fluoride may occur

naturally in water or it may be added in controlled amounts. Some fluorosis may

occur when the fluoride level exceeds the recommended limits. In rare instances the

naturally occurring fluoride concentration may approach 10 mg/ L; such waters

should be de-fluoridated. Accurate determination of fluoride has increased in

importance with the growth of the practice of fluoridation of water supplies as a

public health measure.

Principle

Apparatus/

Reagents

Distillation apparatus consisting of a 1-L round-bottom long-neck

borosilicate glass boiling flask, a connecting tube, an efficient condenser, a

thermometer adapter, and a thermometer that can be read to 200°C. Use

standard taper joints for all connections in the direct vapor path. Position the

thermometer so that the bulb always is immersed in boiling mixture.

Quartz hemispherical heating mantle, for full-voltage operation.

Magnetic stirrer, with TFE-coated stirring bar.

Soft glass beads.

Sulfuric acid, H2SO4, conc, reagent grade.

Silver sulfate, Ag2SO4, crystals, reagent grade.

Procedure 1. Place 400 mL distilled water in the distilling flask and, with the magnetic

stirrer operating, carefully add 200 mL conc H2SO4. Keep stirrer in

operation throughout distillation. Add a few glass beads and connect the

apparatus making sure all joints are tight. Begin heating and continue until

flask contents reach 180°C. Discard distillate.

2. After the acid mixture remaining, or previous distillations, has cooled to 80°C

or below, add 300 mL sample, with stirrer operating, and distill until the

temperature reaches 180°C. To prevent sulfate carryover, turn off heat before

178°C. Retain the distillate for analysis.

3. Add Ag2SO4 to the distilling flask at the rate of 5 mg/mg Cl– when the

chloride concentration is high enough to interfere.

4. Use H2SO4 solution in the flask repeatedly until contaminants from samples

accumulate to such an extent that recovery is affected or interferences appear



in the distillate. Check acid suitability periodically by distilling standard

fluoride samples and analyzing for both fluoride and sulfate. After distilling

samples containing more than 3 mg F–/L, flush still by adding 300 mL

distilled water, redistill, and combine the two fluoride distillates. If necessary,

repeat flushing until the fluoride content of the last distillate is at a minimum.

Include additional fluoride recovered with that of the first distillation. After

periods of inactivity, similarly flush still and discard distillate.

Calculations

& Report

The recovery of fluoride is quantitative within the accuracy of the methods used for

its measurement.

Reference APHA Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater 20th

Edition Method 4500 – F- B.

xi. Standard Operating Procedure for Cyanide (CN-) Total

Scope “Cyanide” refers to all of the CN groups in cyanide compounds that can be

determined as the cyanide ion; CN–. The great toxicity to aquatic life of molecular

HCN is well known; it is formed in solutions of cyanide by hydrolytic reaction of

CN– with water. When total cyanide is determined, the almost nondissociable

cyanides, as well as cyanide bound in complexes that are readily dissociable and

complexes of intermediate stability, are measured preferably using the titrimetric

method.

Principle CN– in the alkaline distillate from the preliminary treatment procedure is

titrated with standard silver nitrate (AgNO3) to form the soluble cyanide complex,

Ag(CN)2–

. As soon as all CN– has been complexed and a small excess of Ag

+ has

been added, the excess Ag+ is detected by the silver-sensitive indicator, p-

dimethylaminobenzalrhodanine, which immediately turns from a yellow to a

salmon color. The distillation has provided a 2:1

concentration. The indicator is sensitive to about 0.1 mg Ag/L.

Apparatus/

Reagents

microburet, 10-mL capacity.

Indicator solution: Dissolve 20 mg p-dimethylaminobenzalrhodanine in 100

mL acetone.

Standard silver nitrate titrant: Dissolve 3.27 g AgNO3 in 1 L distilled water.

Standardize against standard NaCl solution, using the argentometric method

with K2CrO4 indicator, as directed in Chloride, Section 4500-Cl–.B. Dilute

500 mL AgNO3 solution according to the titer found so that 1.00 mL is

equivalent to 1.00 mg CN–.

Sodium hydroxide dilution solution: Dissolve 1.6 g NaOH in 1 L distilled

water.

Procedure 1. From the absorption solution take a measured volume of sample so that the

titration will require approximately 1 to 10 mL AgNO3 titrant. Dilute to 100

mL using the NaOH dilution solution or to some other convenient volume to

be used for all titrations. For samples with low cyanide concentration (≤5

mg/L) do not dilute. Add 0.5 mL indicator solution.

2. Titrate with standard AgNO3 titrant to the first change in color from a canary

yellow to a salmon hue. Titrate a blank containing the same amount of alkali

and water, i.e., 100 mL NaOH dilution solution (or volume used for sample).

As the analyst becomes accustomed to the end point, blank titrations decrease

from the high values usually experienced in the first few trials to 1 drop or

less, with a corresponding improvement in precision.



Calculations

& Report (mg)NH3 − N/L =

(A − B) ∗ 280

sample vol (mL)

Where,

A = mL standard AgNO3 for sample and

B = mL standard AgNO3 for blank.

Reference Ryan, J.A. & Gulshaw, G.W. (1944) The use of p-dimethylaminobenzylidene

rhodamine as an indicator for the volumetric determination of cyanides.

Analyst 69:370.

American Society For Testing & Materials (1987) Research Rep. D2036:19-

1131. American Soc. Testing & Materials, Philadelphia, Pa.

APHA Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater 20th

Edition Method 4500 – CN- D.

2.AMBIENT AIR AND GASEOUS EMISSIONS

The Air pointer R (manual version 2.11 T) would be used for taking measurements and readings for

ambient air quality. This consists of the base unit and depending on the configuration of several gas

modules plus a meteorology and communication unit as previously described in Section 1 of Chapter

2. The equipment used for monitoring and measurements of stack emissions/ gaseous emissions

includes:

1. Gas Badge Plus Personal Gas Monitor (CO) 5 Instrument Manual

2. SIBATA Air sampler

3. AirMetrics Mini volume air sampler

4. RAAS volume Sampler; whose manuals would be used for their operation and calibration in

field.

In addition to the parameters listed there, the following parameters would be measured for ambient air

and gaseous emissions.

Sr. No Parameter

1. Smoke

2. Particulate matter; (PM10), (PM2.5) and (SPM)

3. Hydrogen Chloride (HCl)

4. Chlorine (Cl2)

5. Hydrogen Fluoride (HF)

6. Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)

7. Sulphur oxides; Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)

8. Carbon Monoxide (CO)

9. Lead (Pb)

10. Mercury (Hg)

11. Cadmium (Cd)

12. Arsenic (As)

13. Copper (Cu)

14. Antimony (Sb)

15. Zinc (Zn)

16. Oxides of Nitrogen; (NO) and (NO2)

17. Ozone (O3)



3. HEAVY METALS

Standard operating procedure for the determination of Metals and Trace Elements (mentioned in

the table below) in Water and Wastes by Inductively Coupled Plasma (ICP) - Atomic Emission

Spectrometry.

Table 2.1: List of Analytes measured by ICP

Sr. No. Analyte Symbol

1. Aluminum (Al)

2. Antimony (Sb)

3. Arsenic (As)

4. Barium (Ba)

5. Beryllium (Be)

6. Boron (B)

7. Cadmium (Cd)

8. Calcium (Ca)

9. Cerium (Cr)

10. Chromium (Cr)

11. Cobalt (Co)

12. Copper (Cu)

13. Iron (Fe)

14. Lead (Pb)

15. Lithium (Li)

16. Magnesium (Mg)

17. Manganese (Mn)

18. Mercury (Hg)

19. Molybdenum (Mo)

20. Nickel (Ni)

21. Phosphorus (P)

22. Potassium (K)

23. Selenium (Se)

24. Silica (SiO )2

25. Silver (Ag)

26. Sodium (Na)

27. Strontium (Sr)

28. Thallium (Tl)

29. Tin (Sn)

30. Titanium (Ti)

31. Vanadium (V)

32. Zinc (Zn)

Scope Inductively coupled plasma-atomic emission spectrometry (ICP-AES) is used to

determine metals and some nonmetals in solution. This method is a consolidation of

existing methods for water, wastewater, and solid wastes.

Principle ICP-AES can be used to determine dissolved analytes in aqueous samples after

suitable filtration and acid preservation. This method is applicable to the analytes

mentioned in Table 2.1

Apparatus/ Inductively coupled plasma emission spectrometer



Reagents Analytical balance, with capability to measure to 0.1 mg, for use in weighing

solids, for preparing standards, and for determining dissolved solids in digests

or extracts.

A temperature adjustable hot plate capable of maintaining a temperature of

95°C.

A temperature adjustable block digester capable of maintaining a temperature

of 95°C and equipped with 250 mL constricted digestion tubes.

A gravity convection drying oven with thermostatic control capable of

maintaining 180°C ± 5°C.

Mortar and pestle, ceramic or nonmetallic material.

Polypropylene sieve, 5-mesh (4 mm opening).

Labware - For determination of trace levels of elements, contamination and

loss are of prime consideration. All reusable labware (glass, quartz,

polyethylene, PTFE, FEP, etc.) should be sufficiently clean for the task

objectives. Several procedures found to provide clean labware include

washing with a detergent solution, rinsing with tap water, soaking for four

hours or more in 20% (v/v) nitric acid or a mixture of HNO3 and HCl

(1+2+9), rinsing with reagent water and storing clean.2,3 Chromic acid

cleaning solutions must be avoided because chromium is an analyte.

Glassware - Volumetric flasks, graduated cylinders, funnels and centrifuge

tubes (glass and/or metal-free plastic).

Assorted calibrated pipettes.

Conical Phillips beakers (Corning 1080-250 or equivalent), 250 mL with 50

mm watch glasses.

Griffin beakers, 250 mL with 75 mm watch glasses and (optional) 75 mm

ribbed watch glasses.

Evaporating dishes or high-form crucibles, porcelain, 100 mL capacity.

Narrow-mouth storage bottles, FEP (fluorinated ethylene propylene) with

screw closure, 125 mL to 1 L capacities.

One-piece stem FEP wash bottle with screw closure, 125 mL capacity.

Hydrochloric acid, concentrated

Nitric acid, concentrated

Reagent water.

Ammonium hydroxide, concentrated (sp. gr. 0.902).

Tartaric acid, ACS reagent grade.

Hydrogen peroxide, 50%, stabilized certified reagent grade.

Standard Stock Solutions

Mixed Calibration Standard Solutions

Blanks

Quality Control Sample (QCS)

Instrument Performance Check (IPC) Solution

Spectral Interference Check (SIC) Solutions

Procedure An aliquot of a well-mixed, homogeneous aqueous or solid sample is

accurately weighed or measured for sample processing. For total recoverable

analysis of a solid or an aqueous sample containing undissolved material,

analytes are first solubilized by gentle refluxing with nitric and hydrochloric



acids.

After cooling, the sample is made up to volume, is mixed and centrifuged or

allowed to settle overnight prior to analysis. For the determination of

dissolved analytes in a filtered aqueous sample aliquot, or for the "direct

analysis" total recoverable determination of analytes in drinking water where

sample turbidity is <1 NTU, the sample is made ready for analysis by the

appropriate addition of nitric acid, and then diluted to a predetermined

volume and mixed before analysis.

The analysis described in this method involves multi-elemental

determinations by ICP-AES using sequential or simultaneous instruments.

The instruments measure characteristic atomic-line emission spectra by

optical spectrometry. Samples are nebulized and the resulting aerosol is

transported to the plasma torch.

Element specific emission spectra are produced by a radio-frequency

inductively coupled plasma. The spectra are dispersed by a grating

spectrometer, and the intensities of the line spectra are monitored at specific

wavelengths by a photosensitive device. Photocurrents from the

photosensitive device are processed and controlled by a computer system.

A background correction technique is required to compensate for variable

background contribution to the determination of the analytes. Background

must be measured adjacent to the analyte wavelength during analysis.

Various interferences must be considered and addressed appropriately.

Calculations

& Report

Refer to the manual for ICP-AES

Reference USEPA Method 200.7, Revision 4.4: Determination of Metals and Trace Elements

in Water and Wastes by Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission

Spectrometry

4. MICROBIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS

Microbiological analysis in a laboratory requires an immaculate and pristine environment as well as

procedures which are followed to the dot. American Public Health Association’s book on Standard

methods for the examination of water and wastewater lists all the steps EMC personnel should carry

out in order to test and analyse microbiological parameters. Table 2.2 lists the procedures that EMC

would need to follow for basic testing and analysis in microbiology.

Table 2.2: Procedures to follow for testing and analysis in Microbiology

Sr. No. Procedure Reference Method

1. QA/QC

APHA Standard methods for the

examination of water and wastewater 21st

Edition Method 9020 A, B

2. Laboratory Apparatus; Equipment

Specifications APHA Method 9030 B

3. Washing and Sterilization APHA Method 9040

4. Preparation of Culture media APHA Method 9050

5. Samples APHA Method 9060

6. Rapid Detection Methods APHA Method 9211



7. Heterotrophic Plate Count APHA Method 9215

8. Escherichia coli Procedure APHA Method 9221 F

9. Membrane filter technique for members

of the coliform Group APHA Method 9222

Chapter 3


Section 1

Comparative Analysis of


Section 1

Comparative Analysis of Environmental Quality Standards 1. MUNICIPAL & LIQUID INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENTS

i. Standards for effluent Into Inland Waters

Sr. No Parameter PEQs (mg/l) NEQs (mg/l) India (mg/l) Malaysia (µg/l)

1. Temperature ≤ 3C ≤ 3C ≤ 5C ≤ 2C

2. pH value 6-9 6-9 5.5 - 9 -

3. Biochemical Oxygen Demand at 20C 80 80 30 (at 27C) -

4. Chemical Oxygen Demand 150 150 250 (at 27C) -

5. Total Suspended Solids (TSS) 200 200 100 100 mg/l

6. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) 3500 3500 - -

7. Grease and oil 10 10 10 5 mg/l

8. Phenolic compounds 0.1 0.1 1.0 100

9. Chloride (Cl-) 1000 1000 - -

10. Fluoride (F-) 10 10 2.0 -

11. Cyanide (CN-) total 1.0 1.0 0.2 20

12. An-ionic detergents (as MBAs) 20 20 - -

13. Sulfate (SO4)-2

600 600 - -

14. Sulfide (S-2

) 1.0 1.0 2.0 -

15. Ammonia (NH3) 40 40 5.0 320

16. Pesticides 0.15 0.15 - -

17. Cadmium (Cd) 0.1 0.1 2.0 10

18. Chromium 1.0 1.0 2.0 48

19. Copper (Cu) 1.0 1.0 3.0 10

20. Lead (Pb) 0.5 0.5 0.1 50

21. Mercury (Hg) 0.01 0.01 0.01 50

22. Selenium (Se) 0.5 0.5 0.05 -

23. Nickel (Ni) 1.0 1.0 3.0 -

24. Silver (Ag) 1.0 1.0 - -

25. Total toxic metals 2.0 2.0 - -

26. Zinc (Zn) 5.0 5.0 5.0 100

27. Arsenic (As) 1.0 1.0 0.2 50

28. Barium (Ba) 1.5 1.5 - -

29. Iron (Fe) 8.0 8.0 3.0 -

30. Manganese (Mn) 1.5 1.5 2.0 -

31. Boron (B) 60 60 - -

32. Chlorine (Cl2) 1.0 1.0 - -

ii. Standards for effluent Into Sewage Treatment

Sr. No Parameter PEQs (mg/l) NEQs

1. Temperature ≤ 3C ≤ 3C

2. pH value 6-9 6-9

3. Biochemical Oxygen Demand at 20C 250 250

4. Chemical Oxygen Demand 400 400

5. Total Suspended Solids (TSS) 400 400

6. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) 3500 3500

7. Grease and oil 10 10

8. Phenolic compounds 0.3 0.3

9. Chloride (Cl-) 1000 1000

10. Fluoride (F-) 10 10

11. Cyanide (CN-) total 1.0 1.0

12. An-ionic detergents (as MBAs) 20 20

13. Sulfate (SO4)-2

1000 1000

14. Sulfide (S-2

) 1.0 1.0

15. Ammonia (NH3) 40 40

16. Pesticides 0.15 0.15

17. Cadmium (Cd) 0.1 0.1

18. Chromium 1.0 1.0

19. Copper (Cu) 1.0 1.0

20. Lead (Pb) 0.5 0.5

21. Mercury (Hg) 0.01 0.01

22. Selenium (Se) 0.5 0.5

23. Nickel (Ni) 1.0 1.0

24. Silver (Ag) 1.0 1.0

25. Total toxic metals 2.0 2.0

26. Zinc (Zn) 5.0 5.0

27. Arsenic (As) 1.0 1.0

28. Barium (Ba) 1.5 1.5

29. Iron (Fe) 8.0 8.0

30. Manganese (Mn) 1.5 1.5

31. Boron (B) 60 60

32. Chlorine (Cl2) 1.0 1.0

2. INDUSTRIAL GASEOUS EMISSIONS

Sr. No Parameter PEQs (mg/Nm3) NEQs (mg/Nm

3)

1. Smoke 40% or 2 Ringkemann

scale

40% or 2 Ringkemann

scale

2. Particulate matter

Oil fired furnace

Coal fired

Cement kilns

Grinding crushing

300

500

300

500

300

500

200

500

3. Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) 400 400

4. Chlorine (Cl2) 150 150

5. Hydrogen Fluoride (HF) 150 150

6. Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) 10 10

7. Sulphur oxides 5000 -

Sulfuric acid plants

Other plants except power plants

1700 400

8. Carbon Monoxide (CO) 800 800

9. Lead (Pb) 50 50

10. Mercury (Hg) 10 10

11. Cadmium (Cd) 20 20

12. Arsenic (As) 20 20

13. Copper (Cu) 50 50

14. Antimony (Sb) 20 20

15. Zinc (Zn) 200 200

16. Oxides of Nitrogen

Nitric acid manufacture

Gas fired power plant

Oil fired

Coal fired

3000

400

600

1200

400

400

-

-

3. MOTOR VEHICLE EXHAUST & NOISE

Sr. No Parameter PEQs NEQs

1. Smoke

40% or 2 Ringlemann

scale

40% or 2 Ringlemann

scale

2. Carbon Monoxide 6% 6%

3. Noise 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A)

4.

Passenger cars (<2500 kg)

Carbon Monoxide 1.0 g/km 1.0 g/km

5. HC, NOx 0.7 g/km 0.7 g/km

6. Particulate matter 0.08 g/km 0.08 g/km

7.

Passenger cars (>2500 kg)


8. HC, NOx 0.9 g/km 0.9 g/km


10.

Light commercial vehicles (<1250 kg)


11. HC, NOx 0.7 g/km 0.7 g/km


13. Light commercial vehicles (1250< RW Carbon Monoxide 1.25 g/km 1.25 g/km

14. <1700 kg) HC, NOx 1.0 g/km 1.0 g/km


16. Light commercial vehicles

(RW > 1700 kg)


17. HC, NOx 1.2 g/km 1.2 g/km


19.

Heavy duty diesel engine

Carbon Monoxide 4.0 g/KWh 4.0 g/KWh

20. HC 1.1 g/KWh 1.1 g/KWh

21. NOx 7.0 g/KWh 7.0 g/KWh

22. Particulate matter 0.15 g/KWh 0.15 g/KWh

23.

Heavy duty diesel engine

Carbon Monoxide 4.0 g/KWh 4.0 g/KWh

24. HC 7.0 g/KWh 7.0 g/KWh

25. NOx 1.1 g/KWh 1.1 g/KWh

26. Particulate matter 0.15 g/KWh 0.15 g/KWh

27. Passenger cars


28. HC, NOx 0.5 g/km 0.5 g/km

29. Light commercial vehicles

<1250 kg

<1700 kg

>1700 kg

Carbon Monoxide 2.2, 4.0, 5.0 g/km 2.2, 4.0, 5.0 g/km

30. HC, NOx 0.5, 0.65, 0.08 g/km 0.5, 0.65, 0.08 g/km

31. Motor rickshaws & motor cycles

<150 cc

>150 cc

Carbon Monoxide 5.5, 5.5 g/km 5.5, 5.5 g/km

32. HC, NOx 1.5, 1.3 g/km 1.5, 1.3 g/km

33. Noise (for all above) 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A)

4. AMBIENT AIR

Sr.

No. Pollutants

Time–

Weighted

Average

PEQs

µg/m3

NEQs

µg/m3

India Malaysia

µg/m3

Nepal

µg/m3

Sri Lanka

µg/m3

Australia

µg/m3

1. Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Annual 80 80 80 µg/m

3 - 50 - 50

24 hours 120 120 120 µg/m3 80 70 80 210

2. Oxides of Nitrogen as

(NO)

Annual 40 40 - - - - -

24 hours 40 40 - - - - -

3. Oxides of Nitrogen as

(NO2)

Annual 40 40 80 µg/m3 - 40 - 56

24 hours 80 80 120 µg/m3 70 80 100 23

4. Ozone (O3) 1 hour 130 130 - 180 - 200 200

5. Suspended Particulate

Matter (SPM)

Annual 360 360 360 µg/m3 - - - -

24 hours 500 500 500 µg/m3 - 230 - -

6. Respirable Particulate

Matter (PM10)

Annual 120 120 120 µg/m3 40 - 50 -

24 hours 150 150 150 µg/m3 100 120 100 50

7. Respirable Particulate

Matter (PM2.5)

Annual 15 15 - 15 - 25 8

24 hours 35 35 - 35 - 50 25

8. Lead (Pb) Annual 1.0 1.0 1.0 µg/m

3 - 0.5 - 0.5

24 hours 1.5 1.5 1.5 µg/m3 - - - -

9. Carbon

Monoxide(CO)

8 hour 5 mg/m3 5 mg/m

3 5 mg/m

3 10 mg/m

3 10,000 10,000 10,000

1 hour 10 mg/m3 10 mg/m

3 10 mg/m

3 30 mg/m

3 - 30,000 -

5. DRINKING WATER QUALITY

Sr.

No. Parameters PEQs (mg/l) NEQs (mg/l) WHO (mg/l) India (mg/l) EU (µg/l)

Malaysia

(mg/l)

Nepal

(mg/l)

Sri Lanka

(mg/l)

Physical

1 Color ≤ 15 TCU ≤ 15 TCU ≤ 15 TCU 5 Hazen units - 15 TCU < 5 TCU 5 Hazen

Units

2 Taste Non

objectionable

Non

objectionable

Non

objectionable

Non

objectionable - -

Non

objectionable

Non

objectionable

3 Odor Non

objectionable

Non

objectionable

Non

objectionable

Non

objectionable - -

Non

objectionable

Non

objectionable

4 Turbidity < 5 NTU < 5 NTU < 5 NTU 5 NTU - 5 NTU <10 NTU < 8 NTU

5 Total hardness as

CaCO3 < 500 mg/l < 500 mg/l - 300 mg/l - 500 500 250-600

6 TDS < 1000 mg/l < 1000 mg/l < 1000 mg/l 500 mg/l - 1000 1000 -

7 pH 6.5 – 8.5 6.5 – 8.5 6.5 – 8.5 6.5 – 8.5 - 6.5 – 9.0 6.5 – 8.5 6.5-9.0

Chemical

8 Aluminum (Al) ≤0.2 ≤0.2 0.2 0.03 - 0.2 0.2 -

9 Antimony (Sb) ≤0.005 (P) ≤0.005 (P) 0.02 - 5.0 - - -

10 Arsenic (As) ≤0.05 (P) ≤0.05 (P) 0.01 0.05 10 0.01 0.05 0.05

11 Barium (Ba) 0.7 0.7 0.7 - - 0.7 - -

12 Boron (B) 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.0 15 0.5 - -

13 Cadmium (Cd) 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 - 0.003 0.003 0.005

14 Chloride (Cl) <250 <250 250 250 - 250 250 <1200

15 Chromium (Cr) ≤0.05 ≤0.05 0.05 - 50 0.05 0.05 0.05

16 Copper (Cu) 2 2 2 0.05 2 mg/l 1.0 1.0 1.5

Toxic Inorganic

17 Cyanide (CN) ≤0.05 ≤0.05 0.07 0.05 50 0.07 0.07 0.05

18 Fluoride (F)* ≤1.5 ≤1.5 1.5 1.9 1.5 mg/l 0.4-0.6 0.5-1.5 1.5

19 Lead (Pb) ≤0.05 ≤0.05 0.05 0.05 10 0.01 0.01 0.05

20 Manganese (Mn) ≤0.5 ≤0.5 0.5 0.1 - 0.1 0.2 <0.5

21 Mercury (Hg) ≤0.001 ≤0.001 0.001 0.001 1.0 0.001 0.001 0.001

22 Nickel (Ni) ≤0.02 ≤0.02 0.02 - 20 - -

23 Nitrate (NO3)* ≤50 ≤50 50 45 50 mg/l 10 50 45

24 Nitrite (NO2)* ≤3 (P) ≤3 (P) 3 - 0.5 mg/l - - 0.01

25 Selenium (Se) 0.01 (P) 0.01 (P) 0.01 0.01 10 0.01 - 0.01

26 Residual chlorine

0.2–0.5 at

consumer

end;

0.5–1.5 at

source

0.2–0.5 at

consumer

end;

0.5–1.5 at

source

- - - 0.2–0.5 0.1-0.2 0.2

27 Zinc (Zn) 5.0 5.0 3.0 5.0 - 3.0 - <15

Organic

28 Pesticides - - - 0.1 - - -

29

Phenolic

compound (as

phenols)

- - ≤0.002 0.001 - 0.02 - 0.002

30

Polynuclear

Aromatic

hydrocarbon (as

PAH)

- - 0.01 - 0.1 - - 0.0002

Radioactive

31 Alpha Emitters

bq/L or pCi 0.1 0.1 0.1 - szx- 0.1 - 3

32 Beta Emitters 1 1 1 - - 1 - 30

6. NOISE

Day time dB(A) Leq

Sr. No. Category of area/ zone PEQS NEQS WHO Malaysia

1. Residential Area 55 55 35 55

2. Commercial Area 65 65 - 65

3. Industrial Area 75 75 70 70

4. Silence Zone 50 50 30 50

Night time dB(A) Leq

Sr. No. Category of area/ zone PEQS NEQS WHO Malaysia

1. Residential Area 45 45 35 45

2. Commercial Area 55 55 - 55

3. Industrial Area 65 65 70 60

4. Silence Zone 45 45 30 40

7. TREATMENT OF LIQUID AND DISPOSAL OF BIO-MEDICAL WASTE BY INCINERATION, AUTOCLAVING,

MICROWAVING AND DEEP BURIAL

Sr. No Parameter PEQs NEQs India

For emissions

1. Particulate matter 50 mg/NM3 - 150

2. Nitrogen Oxides 400 mg/NM3 - 450

3. HCl 50 mg/NM3 - 50

4. Total Dioxins and Furans 0.1 ng TEQ/N3 - -

5. Hg and its compounds 0.05 mg/NM3 - -

Liquid waste

6. pH 6.3 – 9.0 - 6.3 – 9.0

7. Suspended solids 100 mg/l - 100 mg/l

8. Oil and grease 10 mg/l - 10 mg/l

9. BOD5 30 mg/l - 30 mg/l

10. COD 250 mg/l - 250 mg/l

11. Bio-assay test 90% survival of fish

after 96 hours -

90% survival of fish

after 96 hours

Section 1 of Chapter 4 Introduction and Scope

Chapter 4

Environmental Modelling

Section 1

Introduction and Scope



Section 1

INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE Modelling is an essential part of all the environmental domains. It helps decision and policy makers to

improve the understanding of natural systems and how they changing the conditions. It helps to

identify the exposure to hazards and the temporal effects from the exposure-making environment

polluted. Environmental modelling supports simulation, modelling and decision-support tools. The

applications of environment modelling carry a special demands dealing with scale, complex

dimensions, modelling with different purposes and adaptability. The environmental models were

reviewed for four types of modelling that include:

a. Dispersion modelling

b. Receptor modelling

c. Surface water modelling

d. Groundwater modelling

The most suitable models were selected in each category and discussed in Section 2 of this chapter.

Section 2

Environmental Modelling Framework

Section 2 of Chapter 4 Environmental Modelling Framework


Section 2

Environmental Modelling Framework 1. DISPERSION MODELLING

It provides sufficient description of the sharp gradients in air pollution concentrations resulting from

the pollutants of the industries.

ADMS 5

The model is useful to monitor air quality conditions along the industries locations using the Gaussian

dispersion method. The air quality impact of proposed and current industries are determined using the

ADMS 5 model.

Main Features

Monitors the surface roughness & complex terrain variations

It also includes the identification of NOx chemistry schemes and short term releases

Extractions of calculation for fluctuations of concentration on short timescales

Odors modelling and visualization of condenses plume visibility

Determination of the air quality concentrations and matching with the international air quality

standards

Calculations of the stack height concentration

Model guidelines

Input: The model input data includes emission data, meteorological data, and background

concentrations. The detailed descriptions are explained below:

Emission data: The emission data represents the emissions rate from the industrial sources

including point, area, line, volume and jet sources. Carbon Dioxide (CO2), Methane (CH4),

Nitrous oxide (N2O), Fluorinated gases are the types of emission data.

Meteorological data: ADMS 5 supports the meteorological data as input. The meteorological

data determines the structure of the atmospheric boundary on the basis of input data value

ranges. It allows to load statistical data and sequential data which helps to analyse the trends

of meteorological trends.

Background concentration: It includes pollutant concentrations due to nearby sources,

natural sources and unidentified sources. The model has the capabilities of measuring the

hourly concentrations and averages concentrations of the background concentration. The

model interface is user friendly and values can be entered directly.

The ADMS 5 model helps to investigate the environmental conditions related to industries pollutants.

The model has all the necessary functions and data layers which has to be included as an input to get

the desirable results by providing input data. The model has five tabs including setup, source,

meteorology background, and grids used to input data and get output.

The detailed information for the tabs is as follows:



Setup

Fig. 4.1 shows main interface setup for the inputs of ADMS 5. The user should provide name of the

site, name of the project, coordinate system, project file, palette, model options and radioactivity

options.

Fig. 4.1: ADMS 5 Set-up Tab

The following features are necessary:

Plume visibility: The model uses special functions to estimate the plume visibility. It defines the

greater effect of momentum and buoyance, which penetrates the inversion of the boundary layers.

Dry deposition: The model easily provides the wet and dry deposition features. Dry depositions are

assumed to be the direct proportional to the surface concentration.

Wet deposition: Wet deposition was calculated through a washout coefficient; irreversible uptake,

and plume strength and deposition decreases with downwind distance. There is also an advanced

option for wet deposition for sulfur dioxide SO2 and HCl using the falling drop method described in

the model.

Odors: This problem occurs when industries network dwells along the residential areas. The two

types of odor rates are calculated including odor units (ou) and European odor units (ouE). Odor unit

is the ratio and european odor unit represents the mass measure that monitors the odors accurately.

Chemistry: The two types of chemistry concentrations which are measured in the model includes:

1) NOx chemistry

2) Amine chemistry



NOx involves the conversion of nitrogen dioxide to nitrous oxide and ozone in the daylight mode. The

amine chemistry is an advanced model option allows for chemical reactions of amine to form

nitramines and nitrosamines. The module has been developed as a consequence of emerging

technologies for Carbon Capture and Storage (CCS) some of which are based on amine extraction of

CO2.

Source: The sources of concentrations should be added using the Fig 4.2. The source type is point,

line, area, volume and jet source whereas the height, velocity, diameter must be defining properly to

generate efficient output. There is a limit of 300 industrial sources to be added at a time.

Fig 4.2 Source Tab



Meteorology

Meteorological data should be added in Fig 4.3. It shows the surface roughness as an input. Met file is

required for the regions to load into the model. Height of recorded wind, hourly sequential data and

statistical meteorological data is required for the input data.

Fig 4.3 Meteorology



Background

Background tab is the integral part as shown in Fig. 4.4. The level of concentration should be defined

according to the actual values in the required units. These values can be entered directly or by

uploading file.

Fig 4.1 Background



Grids

Grids represent the coordinate system on the basis of x and y coordinates. Cartesian and polar

coordinates are the baseline for the output visualization in this model. The results will be overlaid on

Cartesian or polar coordinates grids. This is optional but important aspect to show data location wise

with respect to the receptor type shown in Fig. 4.5.

Fig 4.2: Grids



Output

The model shows output for up to 10 pollutants at a time, which may be either long-term statistical

output or short-term output for each hour or meteorological conditions. Rolling averages, exceedances

and percentile statistics also calculated as shown in Fig. 4.6. The output of the model will be in the

form of ASCII file and the results can be easily imported in different visualization software.

Fig. 4.6: Output



ADMS Mapper

The Output will be shown on a grid of receptor points covering a specified area and/or at specific

receptor locations. Gridded results will be visualized using the ADMS Mapper as shown in Fig. 4.7

where only a single point source is modelled. ADMS 5 produces output containing plume

characteristics, such as plume center line concentration, plume height, plume spread, etc., which is

being shown graphically using the ADMS line plotter shown in Fig. 4.8.

Fig 4.3 Output in ADMS mapper for ADMS 5

Fig 4.4 Gridded lines in ADMS mapper



ADMS 5 (linkage with ArcMap)

For analyzing results, ArcGIS will be used to combine with surfer tool to display plots of pollution

concentration on any appropriate map backdrop. The contours will be used as the basis for extensive

geographical analysis shown in Fig. 4.9.

Fig. 4.9: ArcMap linkage with ADMS 5 results



2. RECEPTOR MODELLING

Receptor models are the statistical procedures for the quantification of air pollutant sources at

the location of receptor. The receptor model uses the physical and chemical characteristics of

particles. The EPA has developed the positive matrix factorization (PMF) to be used in air

quality measurements.

The different features of this model are discussed in the subsequent paragraphs:

Positive Matrix Factorization (PMF)

PMF model is the type of receptor model that break down the sample data into two types of matrices.

It’s a multivariate factor analysis tool including factor contributions G and factor profiles F. The user

should analyze these factor profiles in order to define the source types which contributes to the sample

using the source profile information and discharge inventories. The method of sample concentration is

being used in the model and user-provided weights must be added in the inputs. Different profiles are

compared in order to measure the source contributions. The users need to assign weight to individual

points associated with factors.

Main features

Provide scientific help for the review of water and air quality examination

Capable for the environmental forensic tests and exposure research

Analyzes broad range of sample data including air, surface water and wet deposition

Divide large variables into analytical datasets to measure source contributions

Model guidelines

Input

Two input files, required by the PMF model, are as follows:

(1) Concentration values

The concentration file contains all the concentration values for the participating parameters. It has the

sample numbers, rows and the species as columns with the sample header name. The date format

typed in any format is accepted in the model including (a) Sample ID, (b) Sample ID and data/time,

(c) Date/Time shown in Fig. 4.10. The parameters will be specified with the date and unit as shown in

Fig 3.11. The possible units can be included in a second heading row in the concentration file but not

included in the uncertainty file.



Fig. 4.10 Input

Fig. 4.11 Concentration

(2) Uncertainty

The file contains all the parameters for the calculations of species. The two types of errors such as

analytical and sampling errors may appear. Analytical laboratory provides the estimation of

uncertainty for each module. The model accepts observation-based and equation-based types of

uncertainty files. The observation file provides estimation while equation does not include units. The

dimensions will be same as the concentration file and first column will be started with a data and

sample number. The uncertainty file does not include units, contains one less row than the



concentration file shown in Fig. 4.12. The user will be getting error message if the column and row

headers do not match. The model supports .txt, .csv, .xls file type formats.

Fig. 4.5 Uncertainty Example

Concentration & uncertainty

Concentration and uncertainty scatter plots are shown in the Fig. 4.13. The following input data

statistics will be estimated for each value unit and displayed:

Minimum concentration value

25th percentile

Median – 50th percentile

75th percentile

Maximum value reported

Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) – it shows the variation of measurements have noise or no

noise

Fig. 4.6 Output of concentration and uncertainty

Concentration scatter plots

It is the pre-PMF analysis tool that correlates between the source type and species. It shows the scatter

plots between specified species. The user is responsible for the listings of x-axis and y-axis shown in

Fig. 4.14. One species can be specified for each axis at a time.



Fig. 4.7 Concentration Scatter Plot

Concentration time series

Temporal analysis and patterns will be presented in the concentration time series. It is useful to

determine the expected temporal changes in data for unusual activities. Multiple species can be

overlaid at the same time. User can check the unusual activities with the help of the model. The user is

responsible for the examination of time series for unexpected extreme events that must be avoided in

the model. The species will be shown with the variation of different colors on the plot (See Fig. 4.15).

Fig. 4.8 Concentration Time Series



3. SURFACE WATER MODELLING

The surface water quality models are very significant to manage the surface water quality. The models

help decisions makers to better understand how water changes in terms of pollution.

The following model has been selected:

Canadian water quality index (CWQI)

This model provides a glance of surface water quality measurements with the quality data. The model

has scope, frequency and amplitude, which help to produce the final results. CWQI produces final

results between 0 (poor) to 100 (excellent).

Scope indicate the parameters which are not meeting the water quality guidelines. Amplitude is the

amount by which guidelines are not met. Frequency is the numbers of time by which the standards

were rejected or accepted.

Main features:

Able to combine the measurements in a single number

Provides site specific good water quality measurements

Provides the water suitable conditional equations

Model guidelines

Calculations of the Canadian Water Quality Index

Three factors (i.e., F1, F2 and F3) are relatively very important and must be calculated in order to get

the information on condition of water quality. Each of the three factors that make up the CWQI

should be calculated.

F1 (scope) represents the parameter percentages that is not meeting the guidelines at least once during

the whole time period for failed parameters out of the total number of parameters measured. F1 is

calculated using Eq. (1):

Eq. (1)

F2 is used for the calculation of frequency percentage on the basis of failed tests out of total number

of tests Eq. (2).

Eq. (2)

F3 is used for the calculation of amplitude and represents the amount by which test failed and do not

meet the guidelines. It is calculated in three steps:

Excursion is defined as the number of times by which an individual concentration is greater

than the minimum guidelines. The excursion is calculated when the test value must not above the

guideline shown in Eq. (3):

Eq. (3)

The formula to test the value which is not falling below the guideline shown in Eq. (4):

F1 (Scope) =Number of failed parameters

Total number of parameters

æ

èç

ö

ø÷ x 100

F2 (Frequency) =Number of failed tests

Total number of tests

æ

èç

ö

ø÷ x 100

excursioni =Failed test value i

Objectivej

æ

èç

ö

ø÷ - 1



Eq. (4)

Normalized sum of the excursions (NSE) is obtained by dividing the sum of excursions with the total

number of individual tests.

Eq. (5)

Finally F3 is calculated by an asymptotic function that scale normalization by the following equation

Eq. (6):

Eq. (6)

CWQI is obtained by summing three factors using Pythagoras Theorem Eq. (7).

Eq. (7)

The divisor 1.732 is used for normalization of the CWQI values ranges between 0 and 100, where 0

represents the “poor” water quality and 100 represents the “excellent” water quality.

Output

The results are estimated into one of the following categories including excellent, good, fair, marginal

and poor.

Excellent: (CWQI Value 95-100)

The water quality conditions are very close to natural level. The scientist declared this range as

excellent and suitable for many purposes.

Good: (CWQI Value 80-94)

The “Good” level of water quality contains minor degree of threat and fulfils the desirable levels and

very suitable.

Fair: (CWQI Value 65-79)

The “fair” water quality contains occasionally threats and do not meet desirable levels.

Marginal: (CWQI Value 45-64)

The “marginal” water quality level is frequently threatened and meets unsatisfied condition of

desirable levels.

Poor: (CWQI Value 0-44)

The “poor” water quality level is always threatened and totally failed in meeting the desirable levels,

not suitable at all.

1 - e test valuFailed

Objectiveexcursion

i

ji

testsofnumber

excursion1nse

ini

F3 (amplitude) =nse

0.01nse + 0.01

æ

èç

ö

ø÷

732.1

2 F3 2 F2 2F1100CWQI



4. GROUNDWATER MODELLING

It includes the mathematical and physical models for the ground water investigation. The modelling is

applied to imitate the impact of pollutants on ground water quality. There are more chances that

ground water contamination may lead to serious destructions of quality. There is a need to study and

extract the condition of ground water quality. For that purposes, the AquaChem model was selected

and described below:

AquaChem

AquaChem is the type of model, which was developed for the ground water modelling. It represents

numerical and graphical analysis of water quality parameters. The model has fully functional and have

customizable database including chemical and physical parameters for the comprehensive analysis for

the water quality data. It covers a broad range of calculations and methods used for interpreting and

analyzing the quality of the water. The aquaChem contain tools such as charge balances tool, unit

transformations tool, statistical and sample mixing functions for geothermometer calculations.

Geochemical graphs and plots will be used to represent the chemical water characteristics for

analyzing quality data.

Main Features:

Creation of multiple graphs and plots side by side for highlighting the points interactively

and when the data point is clicked, the corresponding samples are highlighted

It has built-in list for the calculators that allow on the fly analysis on water quality

Includes statistical features such as maximum and minimum ranges, arithmetic mean,

standard deviation, interquartile range, skewness, quantile and kurtosis

Identifications of exceedance parameters from water quality standards for samples and

metals

It links with geochemical programs for the calculations of equilibrium concentrations

Model guidelines

Input: Station name, sample collection date, sample list water type and geology are the input data

parameters used in the model shown in Fig. 4.16.



Fig. 4.9 Input

Creation of Plots

It allows to plot different kinds of numerical data with different designs of plots. There are

many common graphical features for plot. Plot options dialogue contains all the links to the

plots. Parameters, symbols, titles, legend and axis are the types of plot options. Different

types of plots can be created Shown in Fig. 4.17.

Fig. 4.10 List of Plots



Creation of reports

The model allows choosing from various built-in data analysis reports and performing of 6 statistical

tests on the data. The reports are generated in a separate report window as the regular text.

Information can easily be printable and saveable to the required storage drive.

The built-in reports including in the model below shown in Fig. 4.18:

Data Summary

Summary Statistics

Trend Analysis

Outlier Test

Water Quality Standards

Hardness Dependent Standards

Fig. 11 List of reports

Calculator and Convertor

The tools have the capability to calculate using the built-in functions without adding/removing the

individual functions to the options of sample details window (Fig. 4.19).



Fig. 4.12 Calculator

Modelling:

The model has an option of modelling under the tools menu which provides linkage to geochemical

modelling utilities. It provides seven options for the calculations of geochemical parameters. The

following options are as follows shown in (Fig. 4.20):

1) Estimations for saturation indices and equilibrium on the basis of sample analysis

2) Calculations of pH, eH, alkalinity, bicarbonate, carbonate concentration

3) Equilibrate with the present minerals

4) Modelling for adding minerals or chemicals to a solution

5) Advance modelling for inverse modelling or transport calculations

Fig. 13 Modeling



Output:

Map: It stores the x, y coordinates for the location of stations and displays on a grid. It can import on

AutoCAD, ESRI shape file, common image formats etc. It can simply use to display the station

locations through the analysis to interpret the spatial trends with the chemical and physical

characteristics of the samples. The various types of stiff and radial symbols are used to show data in

ESRI polygon formats Shown in Fig. 4.21.

Fig. 14 Map plot options

Histogram: Histogram and frequency are the functions to summarize data distributions. Both

functions use the same principles to display the data into ranges and counting. An example of the

histogram is shown in Fig. 4.22:

Fig. 4.15 Histogram

Depth Profile: It plots the changes in parameter values as sample depth changes. The

corresponding depth profile is shown in Fig. 4.23. It displays the changes measured for each

parameter over a sampling depth.



Fig. 4.16 Depth profile

Section 3

Recommendations for Workable Models

Section 3 of Chapter 4 Recommendations for Workable Models for Environmental Modelling


Section 3

Recommendations for Workable Models for Environmental Modelling

Sr.

No. Type of Modelling Description

Environmental models used across the world Most suitable

model Model Features

USA Canada UK Europe Australia

1.

Atmospheric Dispersion

Modelling

Based on the

mathematical

modelling for

analysing dispersion

of air pollutants

disperse in

atmosphere.

AERMOD

CALPUFF

ADAM

AERSCREEN

PUFF-PLUME

MLCD

MLDP

SLAB-View

Emissions

Trajectory

ADMS-URBAN

ADMS-Roads

ADMS-Screen

Urban Dispersion

Model

EMIT

AEROPOL (Estonia)

ATSTEP (Germany)

CAR-FMI (Finland)

OSPM

(Denmark)

LADM

PDs AUSMOD

TAPM

DISPMOD

AUSPUFF

Atmospheric

Dispersion

Modelling System

(ADMS-5)

Determination of the air quality

concentrations

Monitor complex terrain variations

NOx chemistry schemes identification

2. Receptor Modelling

Involves mathematical

methods to quantify

the sources of air

pollutants at receptor

location

National air sampling

networks,

Mass balance principle,

chemical mass balance

Positive matrix

factorization (PMF),

Bortas-B

experiment, PM 2.5,

Pollution climate

mapping,

PM 10,

Number size

distributions,

EMEP4UK

Receptor models

(RM), organic carbon

(OC), Gas to particle

conversion

Multivariate

Receptor model

Positive matrix

factorization (PMF)

Analyzes sample data including air and

surface water

Divide large variables into analytical

datasets

Provide scientific help for the review of

water and air quality measurements

3.

Surface Water Quality

Modelling

It involves the

prediction of surface

water pollution using

mathematical

simulation techniques.

EFDC

EXAMS

HSPF

PRZM

Aquachem

WatPro

CWQI

DISPRIN

DESCAR

ARIA

(France)

NRM

(Germany)

MUSIC

CRC

Hunter River water

quality model

Canadian water

quality index

(CWQI)

Provide site specific good quality

measurements

Water suitable equations based on poor and

excellent quality

Combining measurements in a single value

4.

Ground Water Quality

Modelling

It involves the

prediction of ground

water pollution using

Mathematical

simulation techniques.

AQUATOX

BASINS

WMOST

3DLEWASTE

WhAEM2000

Visual MODFLOW

Flex

AQUARIUS

HYSIM SERAM

(Switzerland) Delft 3d suite AquaChem

Creation of multiple graphs and plots for

ground water samples

Allows on-the-fly analysis on water quality

Performs equilibrium concentrations

Statistical analysis

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/efdc

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/exams-version-index

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/hspf

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/przm-version-index

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/aquatox

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/basins

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/wmost

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/3dfemwater3dlewaste

https://www.epa.gov/exposure-assessment-models/whaem2000



ENVIRONMENTAL MODELLING FOR EIA

The essential purpose of EIA is the choice between a range of alternatives. Any choice among these

can affect several heterogeneous 'elements"- physical, chemical, ecological, and/or social. These

elements are usually interrelated in complicated ways and there is a mass of information.

Application of modelling in IEE/EIA

The application of Modeling in the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) process has gained

substantial momentum over the past few years. Even so, the misconception exists that modeling

involves predictions only, and many companies are still unaware of the robust solutions and cost

savings this tool has to offer, when correctly implemented. Accessibility to good quality, up-to-date

spatial information has improved significantly, along with data accuracy.

Fig. 4.24: Usefulness of Modeling in EIA

Major applications of modeling with reference to EIA include those related to:

i. Impact mitigation and control,

ii. Public consultation and participation,

iii. Monitoring and auditing

Likewise, the associated advantages of Modelling in EIA include those related to:

i. ability to perform spatial and temporal analysis;

ii. clearer presentation of results/output;

iii. power of models to store, manage & organize complex data;

iv. integrate and manipulate extracted information from data;

v. ease of changing and updating information/data

As experienced in majority of the cases, the respective stakeholders agree that analyzing

developments in their context during the initial stages of the EIA process, in fact, expedites the

identification of potential aspects and impacts that may have to be assessed while the process goes on.

Potential risk factors may be identified upfront and presented to the client to assess the viability of

proceeding with the project. Environmental models reduce timeframes and usually end up presenting

the client with a cost saving.

In addition to identifying and analyzing potential impacts, models coupled with mapping can act as a

powerful spatial planning tool. For example, a Geographic Information System (GIS) is often used to

identify sites suitable for establishing cemeteries and waste disposal facilities. Overlaying several

spatial datasets (soil type, vegetation, ground and surface water, geology etc.), with specific

assessment criteria for each, can produce a map indicating suitable and unsuitable areas. The resulting

Management of large data sets

Data overlay and analysis of development and natural

resource patterns

Trends analysis Spatial

Analysis



sites can be processed as a component in modelling for the potential environmental impacts that could

occur during different stages as a result of such developments. Modelling can be used in all specialist

studies ranging from air pollution control to wetland delineation as an integral part of the EIA process.

The use of environmental models in EIAs will continue to evolve as dealing with global warming

becomes a worldwide priority. In future, even more planned approaches shall be required to meet the

requirements of authorities and governments, while ensuring sustainable development.

Data Analysis and Modelling in IEE/EIA

A large number of environmental management and planning decisions are based on methodologies that

utilize the spatial analysis tools provided by conventional GIS technologies (e.g. digital mapping

or modeling of future changes). In the context of EIA, modeling allows for consideration of

spatio-temporal dimensions common to environmental, biodiversity and planning issues. This is

of particular significance in land-use planning, where the potential significance and magnitude of an

impact is largely dependent on the spatial location of proposed actions and affected receptors at a

given time. The intrinsic spatial nature of land-use planning and the need to integrate environmental

considerations into plan-making give modeling and mapping tools like GIS, the potential to augment

existing EIA methods and plan-making procedures. Similarly, the spatio-temporal implications of

planning decisions make it a significant tool for assessing potential adverse effects on their integrity.

This is achieved by incorporating spatial evidence into the process and by facilitating assessment of

alternatives (or alternative ecological solutions) definition of mitigation measures and monitoring of

changes over time. In this context, data coalition and analysis through modeling can support a more

baseline-led approach to environmental planning and decision-making.

Modeling provides the means to integrate and assess multiple environmental and planning

considerations in a single interface, supporting the systematic prediction and evaluation of

spatially distributed and cumulative impacts, a key assessment consideration in EIA. The EIA

Directive gives special consideration to the cumulative nature of potential environmental impacts.

Cumulative impacts can derive from several individual aspects of a plan/programme (e.g. pollution,

loss of habitats) having a combined effect. Cumulative effects also arise where each of several aspects

has insignificant effects but together they have a significant additive or synergistic effect (i.e.

greater than the sum of individual effects). Evaluating co-occurring environmental resources and their

status or sensitivity through modeling can help address cumulative effects.

Spatial Analysis in EIA

Spatial analysis typically deals with site selection or site suitability assessment of both point/polygon

(e.g. landfill) and linear projects (e.g. railway). This analysis finds its practical applications primarily

in urban and rural planning and development control in Pakistan.

An essential ingredient in spatial analysis is that of interpolation. Interpolation technique combines

multi-criteria analysis used in modelling with mapping tools like GIS. This technique is based on the

ability of models to combine multiple datasets, and the relative importance/significance value for

each assessment criteria or dataset, in a spatially-specific manner. This technique allows for

the systematic aggregation of co-occurring environmental factors. The Interpolation results identify

areas with relative degrees of environmental sensitivity, reflecting the assigned weights as established

by the assessor or gathered through public participation. It can play a significant role in facilitating

the assessment of potential commonalities, overlaps and interactions between environmental

considerations, as well as contributing to the assessment of cumulative effects. Likewise, it could be

used to jointly map and spatially assess sensitive environmental areas.



The outputs illustrate the degree of interaction and overlap between co-occurring environmental

factors (a larger amount of environmental sensitivities occurring at one location can be illustrated as

darker shaded). In this way, they help identify environmentally sensitive areas as well as areas free of

environmental constraints that are, therefore, suitable for development. Overlay mapping can either

combine all relevant environmental aspects (as in SEA) or focus on a set of thematically aspects (such

as biodiversity-related considerations for biodiversity impact assessment).

Step by step approach –Modelling & EIA

Screening & Scoping

Screening is the process through which a decision is taken as to EIA is required for a particular

project.

Data coalition should be started early in the process to ensure the timely application of modelling. An

inventory of relevant available datasets shall need to be collected in this step. Data from third parties

may require additional time and effort to collate and integrate into modelling. Delays in data

provision can affect their timely incorporation and, thereby, restrain the effectiveness of modelling.

Prepare a data checklist to verify that all relevant datasets have been gathered. Based on the

significant environmental factors and the assessment scope, prepare a list of required spatial

datasets. To assist the gathering and incorporation of such datasets, and support data management

tasks, record when the dataset was provided, in which format, who provided it (i.e. source),

whether it included any metadata or quality statement, and whether it contained any

copyright/licensing conditions. This information can be of significant value when describing the

difficulties encountered or any data limitations in the Environmental Report. It can also assist future

EIAs, facilitating data retrieval and quality control, as well as establishing priorities for future

data collation.

Impact Analysis

Impact prediction is a way of ‘mapping’ the environmental consequences of the significant aspects of

the projects and its alternatives. Environmental impact can never be predicted with absolute certainty,

and this is all the more reason to consider all possible factors and take all possible precautions for

reducing the degree of uncertainty.

To facilitate the spatial assessment, transparency tool in vector models or weighted-overlay

operations with raster models can be applied. This would contribute to a more comprehensive

environmental baseline.

Recognizing Alternatives

Spatially specific definition of sectoral land-uses and areas of policy application need to be devised

from the earliest stages of plan development. Although the zoning of lands is more explicit at local

area level, the definition of indicative strategic areas at county level can help address any spatial

issues. These strategic zonings potentially contribute to a more balanced and equally distributed

development plan that ensures environmental protection while allowing for economic and social

development.

Modelling and mapping can facilitate in figuring out the alternatives for EIA in several ways. This can

be done simply by bringing hard copy maps to the workshop and encouraging planners, stakeholders

and/or the general public to draw on them. Alternatively, a mediator could use either GIS or acetate

maps to draw up different zonings resulting from workshop deliberations. These maps can be further



defined by presenting them back to participants, appropriately amending them and reaching consensus

on the final alternatives to be considered in the assessment.

Modelling tools can be used to simulate and explore possible future scenarios based on population

trends, land-use changes, climate, energy supply and consumption, waste water volume and treatment

capacity, etc. These can further inform the identification and development of reasonable and realistic

alternatives.

Assessment Alternative

Spatially specific areas of zoning or policy can be contrasted with the previously prepared

environmental sensitivity maps. This allows for the rapid and clear detection of potential land-use

conflicts. The areas zoned for development that coincide spatially (i.e. overlay) with the areas

containing environmental sensitivities (i.e. ‘hot-spots’ illustrating a high degree of environmental

sensitivity) can be easily identified and quantified.

The number of planning applications for a particular project-type within the study area can be used to

inform the development and assessment of alternatives. The assessment of alternatives can be

informed, for example, by the number of planning applications for rural housing or the number of

wind farms or quarrying permits in a sensitive landscape area. The greater the number of planning

applications, higher the development pressure, and the more potential there will be for (cumulative)

impacts. Also, arguably, the higher the environmental sensitivity of the area and the higher the

number of planning applications, the greater the impact will be.

Areas under urban/industrial/infrastructure development pressure can be quantified and mapped using

GIS and modelling softwares. Quantitative values often provide additional insight into the assessment.

Reporting or matrix-based assessment can also be used to support the spatial analysis, particularly

where the alternatives have not been (or cannot be) mapped.

Spatial assessment of proposed alternatives can be used to detect and highlight potential direct and

cumulative environmental effects/impacts.

The modelling and mapping of environmental constraints alongside the spatially specific provision of

a plan can facilitate easy and early anticipation of the principal direct and cumulative impacts

associated with the accommodation of growth. These can be further assessed using other published

documents/data. The geographic representation of environmental resources/sensitivities and

development pressures within the area can significantly enhance the explicitness of assessments.

The resulting assessment maps can also be used as complementary illustrative Fig.s in the EIA

Report. Potential issues associated with each alternative can be shown along with the ‘preferred’

option in particular and give all environmental and planning considerations a geographical context.

Baseline Mapping & Modelling

Maps for environment baseline mapping & modelling can be generated in this process. Any additional

spatial data gathered throughout the EIA should be mapped and modelled, wherever needed, to

provide a full account of the baseline of environmental factors. Any data deficiencies should also be

addressed, as far as feasible, throughout the assessment. All the relevant environmental datasets can

eventually be overlain to assess composite environmental sensitivities within the study area.

The coalition of data shall continue, and datasets not gathered early in the assessment can still be

incorporated (when available). The inclusion of additional information can be of significant value to

the subsequent stages of the EIA process.

Chapter 5

Environmental Monitoring and Reporting

Framework

Section 1 of Chapter 5 Introduction and Background

Technical Report – Submission 5.1 Page No

169

Section 1

Introduction and Background



Section 1

Introduction and Background Establishing environmental monitoring mechanism is essential for ensuring and safeguarding the

environment for maintaining its goods and services to sustain development in the province. It is also

an effective tool for following progress of development initiatives, monitor the compliance of

polluters, monitor environmental conditions of the region and provide guiding outline to improve

implementation approach. Therefore systematic approach to environmental monitoring is critical for

achieving Sustainable Development in Punjab.

Environmental monitoring can be described as a programme of recurring, systematic studies that

reveals the state of the environment. The specific aspects of the environment to be studied are

determined by environmental objectives and environmental legislation. The purpose of environmental

monitoring is to assess the progress made to achieve given environmental objectives and to help

detect new environmental issues3. It can also be defined as a process with certain intervals repeated

measurements of relevant characteristics with comparable (standardized) methods to follow changes

and trends in nature and the environment over a (longer) period of time taking into account

differentiation of the anthropogenic variations and trends from natural cycles and trends4.

Both of the definitions are dealing with repeated measurements to assess changes in the environment.

Monitoring of environmental conditions is central to informed decision making. It allows the

evaluation of the success or failure of management projects or can pinpoint new environmental

problems that need regulatory attention for the implementation of environmental standards. The

results of these assessments can be quantitative in the form of data and information or alternatively

qualitative, based on subjective observation.

In Punjab the starting point is more difficult and unrewarding in the beginning, as there is very little

data to assess change. Carrying out monitoring for environmental quality is a mandatory function of

EPA Punjab which is bounded by the Punjab Environmental Protection Act, 2012 in Section 6

(1)(i) to:

“Establishes systems and procedures for surveys, surveillance, monitoring, measurement,

examination, investigation, research, inspection and audit to prevent and control pollution,

and to estimate the costs of cleaning up pollution and rehabilitating the environment in

various sectors”

As per the Punjab Environmental Quality Standards, EPA is responsible for monitoring of ambient

air; industrial gaseous emissions; municipal and liquid industrial effluents; drinking water; Noise;

Motor vehicle exhaust and noise; treatment of liquid and disposal of bio medical waste.

In existing structure, the Monitoring, Labs and Implementations (ML&I) directorate is tasked with

looking after the environmental monitoring aspect and delves deep into the laboratories, and

technology transfer subsections of the ML&I directorate. It has been observed that EPA conducts

monitoring exercises for two streams; assessing pressures on the environment and complaint based

monitoring. Director (ML&I) instructs DD (Labs) to carry out monitoring of ambient air, emissions,

noise and smoke across the province. This exercise however, is not conducted according to a specific

schedule or plan but randomly. Complaint based monitoring is carried out to assess environmental

3 Definition by Joint Research Centre (JRC), European Union. Retrieved from

https://ec.europa.eu/jrc/en/printpdf/113097 4 Definition by Joint Research Centre (JRC), European Union.



pollution created by specific sources in different districts of Punjab. Once a complaint for the issuance

of EIA or by public/private complainer is registered with the DD (labs) or DD (ML&I) then an order

is issued, to an inspector at the District level, to carry out site inspection and collection of

sample. Sample collection is done according to the Samples Rules, 2001 but strict adherence is

seldom observed.

At the current state, environmental monitoring is fairly stochastic and available data seems to be very

scattered. There are no organized environmental long term monitoring programs related to any

environmental problem. There is not either sufficient information available on what kind of

environmental monitoring programs exist in Punjab. In our observation most of the datasets are not

publicly available. Environmental monitoring and reporting process is not sufficiently functional

because:

There is no comprehensive and coherent monitoring plan which covers all relevant aspects of

environment (air, noise, water, waste water, etc.), industrial sectors, geographic regions and

assesses/ enforces compliance with notified EQS and conditions set out in EIA.

Monitoring data is not used to the fullest possible extent or used very late so that the

information becomes outdated

It does not have a role in monitoring of biodiversity (endangered species and habitats,

migratory birds, forests, fish, etc.), climate change, Persistent Organic Pollutants (POPs),

hazardous waste, and very limited contribution in protecting and conserving sensitive areas of

Punjab such as RAMSAR sites.

It has limited collaboration with other government departments to jointly monitor and utilize

environmental data from other sources (forest, ground water table, weather data or

information related to the ecology of national parks and protected areas). EPA could have

been a custodian of all environmental data, irrespective to which organization would do the

actual monitoring. That role would have been logical as EPA has an obligation to prepare

State of the Environment reports (SOER’s).

It is evident that there is no time based reporting cycle and EPA Punjab has never prepared

annual environmental state of the environment report as mention in PEPA 1997 (amended

2012) Section 6 (1) (d). It doesn’t develop any journal or publication, providing a summary of

data collected.

The involvement of private sector environmental consultants and laboratories and assurance

of their competencies and quality is not properly organized

Data quality is questionable as there are no SOP’s for sampling of all parameters or sufficient

training for sample takers.

Scientific procedures are not followed while collecting samples (e.g. sampling is not

representative; statistical analysis cannot be performed on the basis of single reading)

There is no data management strategy in place which can ensure that all relevant data is

assimilated in a coordinated manner on a unified platform which can be available in a useable

form.

The modern technology is not used sufficiently as modelling, GIS techniques or on-line

measurement technologies are not in place.

Beyond this, there are multiple reasons to monitor issues related to environment in the province. To

assess this in detail is a key factor in understanding what needs to be done to safeguard the health and

well-being of ecosystems and citizens, protecting the public interest. Other key motivation factors to

organize environmental monitoring are legal obligations in domestic laws and reporting obligations of

Multilateral Environmental Agreements (MEA’s).



Environmental monitoring, on one hand serves the operative information needs of Environmental

permitting, EIA’s, IEE’s and Complaint handlings, but on the other hand it also should serve the

vitally important assessment of trends in the environment by monitoring indicators defined in

Sustainable Development Goals and for provincial purposes through setting of core environmental

indicators for the province (See Section 3 for details).

Punjab Environmental monitoring Center (EMC) would be a separate scientific oriented expert

organization to produce high quality environmental data and information through certified sampling

and laboratory procedures. The centre would take scientific information and makes it accessible to

non-technical audiences by providing information about environmental conditions, trends and

pressures, prediction and forecasting, health advisory. It will also facilitate Environmental Monitoring

and Indicators Network for data collection / collation; both through public and private assets (e.g. soil

through agri, ground water through irrigation). It will also concentrate on data synthesis, analysis

(descriptive, diagnostic), modelling (predictive), forecasting.

The EMC will also act as a reference laboratory for other government labs and private sector

laboratories. It will also help for development and collation of an annual yearly monitoring plan (who

will do what) related to all environmental problems and concerning all environmental data producers

willing to cooperate. As a result of monitoring both the ambient environment and performing

regulatory monitoring it will produce SOE report.

Box 5.1: Environmental Monitoring Record of Finland

At the current state, there is very little data on the environment in Punjab. In Finland environmental

monitoring records date back to 19th century when weather and hydrological observations started.

The total amount of data produced by monitoring programs has rapidly increased in recent

decades. For example the cumulative database of the Finnish Environment Institute contained in

the beginning of this decade water quality data of about 58,000 sampling sites (17 million results),

phytoplankton data of about 2 000 sampling sites (10,000 results) and hydrological data of more

than 2,500 sites (23 million results).

In comparison with almost similar size countries, in area - not in population, Finland produces

annually about possible 10,000 times more measurements on the environment. It also uses these

measurements for decision making. The cost of all these activities are considered to be small

compared to the benefits of having scientific evidence for decision making. Finland, on the other

hand is a quite extreme case in data intensity. It was already in the beginning of 90’s considered,

alongside with Japan to be the most environmental data intensive country. Since then the amount

of sampling and analyzing has somewhat reduced, but on the other hand monitoring in the whole

EU is more frequent through the harmonization of monitoring efforts in the EU through the

European Environmental Agency (EEA).

There has been an effort to reduce monitoring costs through satellite imagery, modelling,

automated monitoring stations/equipment, field measurements and citizen observations. These

have had quite limited impacts in savings – for example through modelling it is assumed that

monitoring of chemicals in the environment could be reduced maximally by 20% from current

levels. Despite development of more cost-effective monitoring technology, tools and methods,

society has grown data hungry. Evidence based decision making and environmental awareness of

citizens requires significant amount of data and their continuous monitoring.

Section 2

Principles for Environmental Monitoring

and Reporting

Section 2 of Chapter 5 Principle for Environmental Monitoring and Reporting


Section 2

Principles for Environmental Monitoring

and Reporting There are eight governing principles that a monitoring and reporting system should adhere to in order

to ensure that it is fit-for-purpose;

1. Scientific

Based on rigorous, open and repeatable scientific investigation

Scientifically credible and accepted by experts, stakeholders and end users

2. Comprehensive

Provide comprehensive data that is;

Representative of key issues and broader impacts or effects

Sufficient for informed decision making

Cover the objectives of the intervention both objective (e.g. Factual, quantitative) and

subjective (e.g. Opinion based, qualitative) evidence

Provide evidence on both the costs and benefits of the legislation

Includes consideration of community, social and traditional knowledge

3. Proportionate

Responsive to changes within a useful reporting time scale

Weight of evidence provided should reflect the importance placed on different aspects of

the intervention

Compatible with other indicators to present an overall picture

Maintain balance between the extent of information requested and the cost of its

provision

4. Effectiveness and efficiency

Deliver monitoring and reporting activities in a coordinated way that makes the best use

of public and private resources

Readily communicable, interesting, clear and easy to understand

Useful for prediction and forecasting

Relevant to needs of policy-makers or enable individuals to make meaningful decisions

5. Standardized data and data management

Data should be standardized

Respect data management protocols and develop new protocols as appropriate, to ensure

compatibility and facilitate the effective sharing of data, support data integrity, permit

comprehensive data analysis, and protect historical records.

6. Verification & Validation

Evaluate how closely the documents and procedures were followed during data

generation

Identify the project needs for records, documentation, and technical specifications for

data generation; and determining the location and source of these records

Verifying records that are produced or reported against the method, as per the field and

analytical operations such as sample collection, sample receipt, sample preparation,

sample analysis etc.

Section 2 of Chapter 5 Principle for Environmental Monitoring and Reporting


Use analytic & sample-specific processes that extend the evaluation of data beyond

method or procedural compliance (i.e., data verification) to determine the analytical

quality of a specific data set.

7. Timeliness

Timing of reporting should align with the requirement of related agencies like EPA,

EP&CCD and IETT

Provide data that is up-to-date at the point of use

8. Accessibility

All evidence gathered should be made available to the general public (subject to

appropriate aggregation and confidentiality limitations).

Section 3

Environmental Monitoring

&

Reporting Framework

Section 3 of Chapter 5 Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Framework


Section 3


Framework Environmental monitoring is a powerful and irreplaceable tool for evidence based environmental

management. EPA Punjab undertakes a range of core regulatory tasks that includes sate of

environment monitoring, inspections, audits, and response to community complaints and public

enquiries. Monitoring of these key environmental procedures are of paramount importance, as they

provide data and information on trends of prioritized environmental problems in a long run. These

trends could be popularized in periodically published State of the Environment Reports (SoER),

which provide grounds for renewal of priorities, strategies and programs as some environmental

problems get solved and some others get worse. Eventually, both operational monitoring of legal

obligations as well as strategic monitoring of indicators serve the same purpose – they produce

material for science based environmental awareness of citizens and support evidence based decision

making as shown in Fig. 5.1.

Fig. 5.1: Overall Approach for Environmental Monitoring

MEAs Requirement

Protection of Public

Interest

Legal Obligations

ENVIRONMENTAL

MONITORING

Permit Requirements

EIA Requirements

Complaints Handling

Control of Compliance

Reporting

Environmental Indicators (PCEI and SDG)

Trends in environment

State of Environment

Reporting

Renewal of priorities,

strategies and programs

EVIDENCE BASED

DECISION MAKING



METHODS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

Environmental monitoring can be done in several ways and methods that are exhibited in Fig. 5.2.

Sampling, observations and field measurements are based on site visits in particular locations,

whereas automatic monitoring stations, satellite observation or laser measurement do not require staff

to visit on observed locations. The whole chain from sampling to Fig.s in databases is an expensive

and sensitive process, where everything needs to be performed according to high quality, set standards

and procedures. Samples may be un-representative or easily get contaminated if careful sampling

procedures are not followed. Issues can be done while preserving the samples, or in pre-treatment of

samples in laboratory before analysis. Therefore, it would be necessary to have relevant education,

good training and strict quality control from cradle to grave – from sample taking – to storing of data.

Fig. 5.2: Methods for Environmental Monitoring

Recent developments in measurement technologies and data transfer technologies have enabled an

emergence of automatic monitoring stations, satellite imagery, remote sensing and laser

measurements. All of these require more capital investments than traditional monitoring by sampling

and laboratory analysis and are only limited to some parameters – for example heavy metal analysis

and organic pollutants cannot yet be monitored remotely.

On the other hand automatic monitoring stations, like water quality monitoring bayous, are able to

sample, analyse and send data more frequently and thus provide more reliable data on the

circumstances on the immediate environment of the equipment. Placing of these kind of stations

Me

tho

ds

for

Envi

ron

me

nta

l m

on

ito

rin

g

Sampling

Preservation & Transport of samples

Pretreatment of samples

in the laboratory

Laboratory analysis

Laboratory data base

Observations

Organizing the field and laboratory data

Field Measurements

Metadata base Environmental Data Base

Automatic Monitoring Stations

Sending raw data via

internet or radio waves Satellite Imagery and

Remote Sensing

Laser Measurements

1. 1. Education 2. 2. Training 3. 3. Strict 4. Quality 5. Control

Statistical Analysis

Scientific Reports Indicators

State of Environment Report (SoER)



require understanding of environmental conditions and can be done only by environmental experts.

Also understanding the representativeness of that sampling location is a task suitable for experts.

FRAMEWORK FOR AMBIENT ENVIRONMENT MONITORING AND

REPORTING

The information explosion is widening the gap between citizens, decision makers and scientists.

Therefore it is extremely difficult for a Decision Maker or even a layman to get a holistic picture of

changes in the environment – even scientists get lost in the labyrinth of numbers without meanings.

The absence of meaningful environmental information is a problem for sensible management of

environmental issues. Meaningful and reliable information is a key management tool in environmental

management at all levels including national level.

‘Indicators represent an empirical model of reality, not reality itself, but they must, nonetheless, be

analytically sound and have fixed methodology for measurement’5.

Punjab EMC will use three steps structural approach for environmental indicators monitoring and

reporting that includes;

1. Environmental Monitoring and Indicators Network

2. Pressure-State-Response Model for Environmental Indicators

3. DPSIR Model for Monitoring and Reporting

(i) Environmental Monitoring and Indicators Network (EMIN)

In order to design environmental monitoring programmes for Punjab in a cost-effective manner it

would be feasible to apply EMIN- process (Environmental Monitoring and Indicators Network) 6

. It

starts from defining what kind of indicator framework should be selected for selecting indicators for

Provincial Core Set of Environmental Indicators (PCEI).

Fig. 5.3: Structure for Environmental Monitoring and Indicators Network (EMIN)

5 Hammond, A. etal. 1995. Environmental Indicators: A systematic approach to measuring and reporting on

environmental policy performance in the context of sustainable development. World Resources Institute 6 EMIN is a cost-efficient way to have sufficient understanding on the nature of environmental problems that

Punjab is facing now

Envi

ron

me

nta

l Mo

nit

ori

ng

and

In

dic

ato

rs N

etw

ork

(EM

IN)

Data sharing protocols/policy

Meta-data base

Environmental data base

State of Environment Report (SoER) for

Punjab

Sustainable decisions in the province

Assessment of hot spots on all 10

problems Gaps in environmental monitoring

Top 10 environmental problems

Indicators for top 10 environmental

problems Provincial Core set of Environmental

Indicators (PCEI)

Renewed Monitoring Programs



The EMIN-process seeks to allocate future environmental monitoring resources optimally by

assessing environmental monitoring needs in a holistic and participatory expert process. Following

steps involved for an effective EMIN exercise in Punjab;

• Invite all environmental data holders, including government agencies, academic institutions,

I(NGO)’s and other data holders and monitoring organizations to Environmental Monitoring

and Indicators Network (EMIN) to support efforts of Government of Punjab through the

Environmental Protection Department (EPD) or future Environment Protection and Climate

Change Department (EP&CCD) to get and share reliable environmental data

• Initiate discussions on data sharing policies of Punjab

• Define the most important environmental problems of Punjab

• Prioritize Top-10 environmental problems with a system analytic method

• Perform a preliminary spatial analysis on possible “hot-spots” for each environmental

problem

• Define environmental indicators for prioritized environmental problems

• Assess existing environmental monitoring programmes and data sets of different data

producers

• Create a meta-database on environmental monitoring and research

• Assess gaps between existing monitoring and defined indicators

• Create a Provincial Core Set of Environmental Indicators (PCEI), also taking into account

obligations from MEA’s and SDG’s

• Making gap analysis on monitoring (current versus PCEI)

• Fill the observed gaps in monitoring by establishing necessary monitoring programmes with

defined locations, sampling/measurement intervals and methods

• Draft a data-sharing policy for Punjab and/or contracts with data holders to provide data for

open databases and/or production of the State of the Environment book and periodic state of

the Environment reporting with PCEI-indicators

• Establish environmental databases including the EMIS and/or links to existing databases

As a part of the EMIN-process, the future ‘Strategy and Policy Department of Environment Protection

and Climate Change Department’ would need to do a complete meta-database survey. Other than

EMC, there are many other departments of Punjab and a variety of non-government institutions l that

are also collecting environmental monitoring data and can contribute in meta data base. These are the

stakeholders that can be involved in the State of Environment Reporting process, either as providers

of information, advice or expertise, or as users or interested parties in the conclusions and

recommendations in the annual SoE report. Fig. 5.4 provides a network of stakeholders that can play

role in meta-database and SoE monitoring and reporting.



Fig. 5.4: Network of Stakeholders with a role in Metadata Base and SoE monitoring and

reporting

Indicator sets are usually based of frameworks and they are steering the development. The purpose

of frameworks is to ensure that information is balanced and include minimally three dimensions:

Pressures to ecosystems and human health, State of the Environment and Societal Responses as

required in the traditional P-S-R framework of the OECD (Organization for Economic Cooperation

and Development)7. Punjab EMC and EP&CCD will use 2 models for environmental indicators

monitoring and reporting.

(ii) Pressure-State-Response Framework for Environmental Indicators

The PSR model helps in defining human activities that exert pressures on the environment and affect

its quality and the quantity of natural resources i.e. state. Society responds to these changes through

environmental, general economic and sectoral policies and through changes in awareness and

behaviour, termed as societal response (Fig. 5.5). EMC may start with PSR Model to identify the

pollutants/pressures impacting the state of environment.

There are 2 defining characteristics of indicators:

1. Indicators reduce the number of measurements and parameters that normally would be

required to give. As a consequence, the size of an indicator set and the level of detail

contained in the set need to be limited. A set with a large number of indicators will tend to

clutter the overview it is meant to provide.

2. Indicators simplify information about complex phenomena to improve communication. Due

to this simplification and adaptation to user needs, indicators may not always meet strict

scientific demands to demonstrate causal chains.

7 This Pressure-State-Response framework, following a cause-effect-social response logic, was developed by the

OECD which is increasingly widely accepted and internationally adopted, it can be applied at provincial level

(as in this report), at sectoral levels, at the level of an individual industrial firm, or at the community level.

EP&CCD and EMC

Government Departments/

Agencies

International Organizations

Academia

Industries / Chambers/

Associations

Private Sector and

Public Sector Companies

NGO

Local Government

&Municipalities

Provincial: Irrigation Department, Punjab Meteorological Department, HUD&PHED National: Pakistan Space and Upper Atmosphere Research Commission Others: Ministries, Statistical departments

Such as World Bank, Asian Development Bank, USAid, WHO, JMP Programs

Research Institutes Universities Govt. Research Organization like Pakistan Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (PCSIR)

Such as Leather Associations Brick Kilns Association Chamber of Commerce & Industries

Consultancy Firms Certified Private Laboratories

Public Sector Companies like Punjab Saaf Pani or Waste Management Companies

Environmental like WWF Industry specific

Health

Such as WASAs, Municipalities,

Metropolitan Corporations



Fig. 5.5: Pressure-State-Response Model

(iii) Driving force-Pressure-State-Impact-Response (DPSIR) model for State of the

Environment Reporting (SoER)

The State of the Environment (SoE) monitoring and reporting process is an important tool for

environment planning and management in Punjab. It plays a vital role in policy development and

informs decision-makers of the consequences of actions and changes in the environment. It involves

setting targets, monitoring, analysing and interpreting data, then reporting findings, and continuing

this process over time. The SoE Report process streamlines national and international monitoring and

reporting requirements to ministries, donors, and the Secretariats of MEAs.

For SoE reporting, the future ‘Strategy and Policy Department of Environment Protection and

Climate Change Department’ will use Driving force-Pressure-State-Impact-Response (DPSIR)

model8 for greater details in order to design environmental monitoring programmes for Punjab in a

cost-effective way.

The D-P-S-I-R Model will help the department to support decision making through the provision of

credible environmental information. This will also help to present the environmental indicators

needed to provide feedback to policy makers on environmental quality and the resulting impact of the

political choices made, or to be made in the future (Fig. 5.6).

The D-P-S-I-R Model defines;

Driving forces to environmental changes, (e.g. population growth)

Pressures on the environment, (e.g emissions of CO2 to the atmosphere, tn/year)

State of the Environment, (e.g concentrations PM 2.5 in ug/m3 in a city air as 24

hour average)

8 The DPSIR model is a global standard for State of Environment reporting and part of a systems approach that

takes into account social, political, economic, and technological factors, as well as forces associated with the

natural world. This framework for integrated environmental reporting and assessment was developed by the

European Environmental Agency (EEA) in 1999 and has since been widely adopted in the study of

environmental problems. This approach has proven to have utility in understanding the genesis and persistence

of environmental problems at scales ranging from the global (United Nations Environment Programme. 2002.

Global Environment Outlook 3: Past, present and future perspectives. London: Earthscan)

Human Subsystem

Economy

Population

Environmental Subsystem

State of the Environment

Ecosystem

PRESSURE STATE

RESPONSE

Natural Feedback

Societal Response

Decision Actions

Direct Pressure

Indirect Pressure

Resource Depletion

Imp

acts Imp

acts

Labo

ur

Go

od

s &

Se

rvic

es



Impacts to human health and ecosystems and (e.g outpatient cases of Lung Disease

in Lahore)

Responses to mitigate the pressures (e.g compulsive orders given to industries on

exceedance of EQS’s in emissions of particles per year in Lahore)

Fig. 5.6: The D-P-S-I-R – Model

What is happening to environment and why?

What are the consequences for people and environment?

What is being done and how effective it is?

Fig. 5.6 exhibits a chain of links starting with ‘driving forces’ (economic sectors, human activities)

through ‘pressures’ (emissions, waste) to ‘states’ (physical, chemical and biological) and ‘impacts’ on

ecosystems, human health and functions, eventually leading to political ‘responses’ (prioritisation,

target setting, indicators).

For a comprehensive State of Environment Reporting of Punjab, the D-P-S-I-R Model will consider

the following components;

1. Driving forces – What are the factors that driving environmental change in Punjab?

The department will examine the main factors that generate the pressures on the environment,

particularly those associated with changes in population and economic activity. Driving force

could be the social, demographic and economic developments in societies and the corresponding

changes in life styles, overall levels of consumption and production patterns. A primary driving

force could be demographic development whose effects are translated through related land use

changes, urban expansion, industry and agriculture developments, energy consumption, and

transportation.

2. Pressures on the environment – What are the stresses on the Environment of Punjab?

1. Drivers

Push Changes on environment

2. Pressure

Trend that appears in the environment resulting from

a driver

3. State

Current environmental conditions and trends

4. Impact

Implications of the current state on humans and the

environment

5. Response

Actions that can be taken to better acheive a more

sustainable future



The Pressures are the effects of driving forces on the environment. Examples of pressure

indicators could be the emission of nutrients and pesticides by agriculture, production of waste or

emissions (of chemicals, waste, radiation, noise) to air, water and soil.

3. State of the Environment – What is the Quality of the Environment of Punjab?

As a result of pressures, the ‘state’ of the environment (a combination of the physical, chemical

and biological conditions) is affected. State defines the quality of the various environmental

components (air, water, soil, etc.) in relation to their functions. Examples of the indicators could

be Air quality (at provincial/divisional/district level), Water quality (surface water, groundwater,

drinking water), - Ecosystems (biodiversity, vegetation, forests, protected areas), soil quality and

Human health.

4. Impacts to human health and ecosystems – What are consequences of changes in state of the

environment on the economy and citizens of Punjab?

Impacts are the physical, chemical or biological changes in state of the environment that

influences the quality of ecosystems, their life supporting abilities, and ultimately impact on

human health and on the economic and social performance of society.

5. Responses to mitigate the pressures – How the Government of Punjab are reacting to these

consequences and how does the response affect the drivers in the future?

Response encompasses of what is being done, how effective is it and what actions could be taken

for a more sustainable future. It also covers a response by society or policy makers as a result of

an undesired impact and can affect any part of the chain P-S-I. For instance, a response related

to driving force like transportation could be a policy to change mode of transportation from

private (cars) to public transport (metro buses or trains). A response related to pressures could be

revision of hazardous waste rules or development of a strong action/implementation plan to

reduce the pressure.

This comprehensive framework for state of environment monitoring and reporting will bring

transparency, informed environmental information and decision making, enhanced communication

between scientists and stakeholders by simplifying the complex connections between humans and the

environment and increased public awareness.

The statistical framework supporting DPSIR for SoE Monitoring and Reporting is summarised in Fig.

5.7.



Fig. 5.7 Statistical framework for SoE Monitoring and Reporting through DPSIR Model

National and Provincial Accounts

and Statistics

Demographic and Social Statistics

Monitoring of natural hazards and

Climatic Change

Economic Activities

Demographic and Social Drivers

Natural Drivers

DRIVERS

PRESSURES

STATE

IMPACT

RESPONSE

Resource abstraction,

production of greenhouse gases, use of

pesticides, land use, hazardous

waste generation

Quality Quantity Structure

Functioning of

Physical, chemical and

biological Environment

Impacts on Economy

Human health Ecosystem

Protection Incentives

Participation Policies Actions

Economic Instrument

Key Pressure Indicators

Economic Instruments

Participation Pollution Prevention

Protection, Restoration Compensation of damages

Synthesis of Environmental

Indicators

Warning issued Through electronic and print

media, awareness campaign, etc

Environmental Monitoring

Data Modelling

Environmental Accounting



WHAT TO MONITOR?

It is quite essential to identify the top environmental problems that require monitoring on priority

basis. This can be defined in the EMIN –process.

Under each environmental problem there are several types of emissions/chemicals, which need to be

monitored in order to assess the extent of that particular environmental problem. In an optimal

situation, monitoring through EMC would be concentrated to top 10 environmental problems and

within them more emphasis in monitoring of more important problems. Spatially there should be

emphasis on the hot-spots of each environmental problem (and clean/natural state reference

locations).

Box 5.2: Top 10 Environmental Problems in Nepal (2013)

The graph presented below provides the TOP-10 environmental problems in Nepal in 2013,

identified through EMIN process, just as an example. In case of Punjab, the priority order may be

different. These problems do very depending on a country and time due to different kinds of

environmental conditions, patterns in human activities and their impact as well as success of

environmental mitigation measures in time. For example in Finland acidification was in 1970’s and

1980’s the dominant environmental problem, but today it would probably not even rank to list of

Top- 10 problems, as the root causes have been largely solved. In a global level same largely

applies to the depletion of ozone layer –successful measures of all countries in the Montreal

protocol has been able to reduce 98% of emissions about 100 ozone depleting substances.

There has been an effort to reduce monitoring costs through satellite imagery, modelling,

automated monitoring stations/equipment, field measurements and citizen observations. These

have had quite limited impacts in savings – for example through modelling it is assumed that

monitoring of chemicals in the environment could be reduced maximally by 20% from current

levels. Despite development of more cost-effective monitoring technology, tools and methods,

society has grown data hungry. Evidence based decision making and environmental awareness of

citizens requires significant amount of data and their continuous monitoring.

Graph 1. Top 10 most important environmental problems in Nepal in 2013



As a starting point to establish an environmental monitoring programme for Punjab, a following list of

monitoring programs is suggested. This list could be used as a one starting point for EMIN-process.

Items, which need urgent and acute upgrade or establishment of monitoring programs are highlighted

as *** alarmingly urgent, ** urgent * Important.

A tentative list of Environmental Indicators for monitoring (some of them have several

parameters) is presented below;

Water

- **nutrient levels in waterways (several parameters)

- *concentrations of toxins in waterways (several parameters)

- *** discharge of wastewater (lots of parameters) from industrial sources and municipalities

(this includes both the flow and concentration measurements)

- non-point load discharges(several parameters)

- *** drinking water quality (lots of parameters)

- *** ground water quality(several parameters)

Air

- *** Ambient air; urban air quality monitoring (several parameters, incl PM2, PM10, SOx,

NOx, VOC, ground level ozone). EPA automatic monitoring stations network need to be

widened to x in Lahore and similar schemes need to be established in other big cities

- *** Industrial gas emissions (stack flow and concentration measurements) should be

performed as self-monitoring of industries complemented with EMC monitoring

interventions. EMC should periodically publish maps based on dispersion model results based

on monitoring results) (several parameters specific to industries)

- *** Motor vehicle exhausts (several parameters, as for ambient air)

- *** Non-point load source emissions, like rice stubbs burning, open burning of wastes

(several parameters, based on periodic assessments on the dimensions of activities)

- ** Deposition and air quality in background areas

Soil, land cover and desertification

- * Polluted lands, by classification

- *** Naturally high concentrations of harmful substances on the ground (fluoride, arsenic,

radon)

- *** Satellite imagery in land Cover mapping

- * The amount and quality of topsoil in selected sampling plots

- *** Forest cover (selected % of minimum foliage)

Waste

- *** Solid waste (quantities by type and treatment/fate)

- *** Hazardous waste (quantities by type and treatment/fate)

- ** Recycling/reusing rate of selected wastes

- * Material efficiency of production

Biodiversity

- *** The coverage of different types of ecosystems

- *** The status of endangered species

- *** Monitoring of selected indicators species for different types of ecosystems

- *** Protected land areas total and by biotope



- ** Bird ringings in Punjab

- *** Observations of amounts of migratory birds

- ** Monitoring of amphibians and reptiles

- ** Monitoring of wild mammals

Natural resources

- *** Forest biomass

- * Extraction of gravel and rock aggregates

- * Extraction of oil and gas

- * Level of groundwater table

Noise

- ** Noise levels in residential and sensitive areas in selected municipalities

Climate

- *** Emissions of climate gases (CO2, N20, methane, ODS and F-gases, black carbon) of

industries, enegy production plants,

- ** Prevalence of extreme weather conditions (HAT-days, frequency of floods etc)

- * UV-B radiation levels

- *** The use of satellite images in the monitoring of snow cover in mountains

- * radiative forcing

- ** Measurements of the stratosphere, like stratospheric ozone levels

Land use

- ** eco-system types (forest types, grazeland, agriculture, water ways)

- ** conservation areas

- ** wetlands

- ** infrastructure:

- industrial areas

- residential areas

- commercial areas

- roads and railroads

Chemicals, radioactive and hazardous substances (POP’s, ozone depleting substances and F-

gases)

- ***Production, use, import and export of plastics

- ***Production, use, import and export of pesticides by type (POP’s)

- *** Production, use, import and export of selected industrial chemicals (POP’s)

- *** Production, use, import and export of ODS’s and F-gases

- *** Monitoring of heavy metal concentrations in fish and sediment

- *** Monitoring of selected POP’s concentrations in fish and sediment

- *** Monitoring of lead

- * Monitoring of external radiation and airborne and deposited radioactive substances

- * Monitoring of some hazardous substances in some selected foodstuffs

Monitoring of societal response activities on the environment (Response indicators)

- *** Amount of EIA NOC’s and pending cases

- *** Amount of environmental permits (once permitting starts) and pending cases

- ** Amount of environmental taxes collected



- ** Amount of deposits paid (e.g. glass bottles, plastic bottles)

- * Environmental investments in industries and municipalities

- * Energy efficiency of selected industrial plants and/or municipalities, traffic sector, real

estate’s sector and households

Section 4

Environmental Monitoring Plan for Punjab

Section 4 of Chapter 5 Environmental Monitoring Plan for Punjab


Section 4

Environmental Monitoring Plan for Punjab

What is a sufficient amount of monitoring? That cannot be answered directly as there are no

universally agreed standards or even recommendations for that for all types of monitoring. That is

why administration needs capacities of environmental scientists for expert judgement and knowledge

on the local circumstances on that matter. That would be best done within EMIN –process, facilitated

by environmental scientists of the administration, in the presence of actual data producers and

scientists who have theoretical background and practical experience on each type of monitoring and

related environmental problems.

In this section, we are only giving a proxy set of suggestions for “monitoring intensity” and

presenting background thinking to justify these suggestions.

AIR QUALITY MONITORING PLAN

Currently there are 6 air quality monitoring stations in Lahore. They are the only AQ monitoring

station in the whole of Punjab. These stations have produced data only since November 2017 and the

results are posted daily in EPA website. This is very useful approach and shows already the

importance of these measurements as threshold limits are exceeded daily in most of the measurement

stations.

Air quality information is crucial for citizen to prepare and protect themselves for episodes of high

concentrations of air pollutants. EPD has drafted also an important paper on air quality – an action

plan named: Standing instructions for management of episodes of poor air quality in the Punjab

(2017), draft. The paper introduces Air Quality Index (AQI), which has threshold levels of 6 air

pollutants (PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NO2, O3 and CO) to indicate with colours green, light green, yellow,

orange, red and maroon respectively representing good, satisfactory, moderate, poor, very poor and

extremely poor quality of ambient air. Index levels are then suggested to be used in measures to

protect citizens through selected measure and to reduce emissions instantly.

Similar types of AQI’s have been used in many countries successfully for decades. For Punjab’s

perspective, it is important to be able to show differences between days of extremely bad pollution

levels, like during the episodes of burning Rice Stubbs in October and November. In a long run, as air

quality gets better new threshold levels should be taken in use as there is no such thing as adaptation

to bad air quality, stricter threshold would be needed to protect Punjab population and to raise

awareness on importance of good air quality for health.

These kinds of networks of monitoring stations would need to be established in all other big cities of

Punjab, namely Rawalpindi, Gujranwala, Faisalabad, Multan and Sialkot and then expanded to

intermediate and small size cities, which have industries.

Air quality should be continuously monitored in the influence areas of industries, traffic and even

small-scale combustion in the future (areas were solid wastes are burned openly or areas were rice

stubbles are burned in October-November time, as well as in the background areas.



Since it is not possible to monitor everywhere in the district, the concept of spatial scale is used in

proposing physical location of an air monitor. When designing an air monitoring network, one of the

following six objectives should be considered:

Highest concentrations expected to occur in the area covered by the network

Representative concentrations in areas of high population density

Impact of specific sources on ambient pollutant concentrations

General background concentration levels

Extent of regional transport of pollutants among populated areas and in support of secondary

standards

Judge compliance with or progress made towards meeting the PEQS and to track pollution

trends

Box 5.3: Comparison with Finland Air Monitoring Stations

In order to assess how many air quality monitoring stations would be needed in Punjab we made

an estimate based on experience from Finland’s capital, Helsinki, which have 11 monitoring

stations. The area of Helsinki is 213 km2 and population 0.63 Million (and the surrounding greater

Metropolitan area is 770km2 and the population of 1.1 Million). If compared arithmetically with

areas covered by major cities of Punjab the need of air quality monitoring stations would be 12 in

Lahore, 5 in Faisalabad, 2-3 in Gujranwala, 4 in Multan, 7 in Rawalpindi and Sialkot 1(3) station,

but as Sialkot has a strong industrial cluster within its borders and surroundings it should have

probably about 3 air quality monitoring stations. This is to clarify that this estimate is only trend-

setting and would need to be localized with better information on traffic, topography, wind

patterns and industrial emissions and air quality data, including variabilities in concentrations,

once data starts to accumulate.

Fig 1. Stationery and Mobile Air Monitoring Stations in Helsinki



Number and Distribution of Monitoring Locations

The EMC will develop a system which specifies an exclusive area, or spatial scale, that an air monitor

represents. The goal in establishing air monitoring sites is to correctly match the spatial scale that is

most appropriate for the monitoring objective.

EMC should design a monitoring plan for yearly basis in order to satisfy a variety of purposes,

including monitoring compliance with the PEQS/WHO, public reporting of the Air Quality Index

(AQI), assessing population exposure and risk from air toxics, determining pollution trends,

monitoring specific emissions sources, investigating background conditions, and evaluating computer

models.

Knowledge of existing air pollutants levels and pattern within the area are essential for deciding

number and distribution of stations. The air quality data was not available therefore number of

monitoring stations in a city are selected based on Population Fig.s which can be used as indicators of

region variability of the pollutants concentration.

A general guide is used for estimating no. of minimum stations in the cities of the Punjab Province

(major and intermediate cities) is described as follows:

Table 5.1: General guide for no. of stations vs population

Population No of Stations

< 100000 1

100000 - 1000000 1+ 0.4 x per 100000 pop

100000 - 5000001 2 + 0.2 x per 100000 Population

> 5000000 4 + 0.15 x per 100000 Population

With reference to the above table, the number of air quality monitor/stations proposed in each city

with respect to its population is listed in Table 1.2.

Table 1.1: Proposed Number of Air Monitors/Stations in each city

City No of Stations Population City No of Stations Population

Bahawalpur 3.4 612800 Multan 6.8 2362136

Chiniot 1.8 191351 Muzaffargarh 1.8 180692

D G Khan 2.48 378711 Okara 2.2 326726

Faisalabad 8.6 3281725 R Y Khan 2.6 426300

Gujranwala 6.6 2369049 Rawalpindi 6.8 2406962

Gujrat 2.6 400665 Sahiwal 2.6 425819

Jhang 2.6 410884 Sargodha 4.2 789631

Kasur 2.6 426411 Sheikhopura 2.6 430792

Lahore 17.5 8681007 Sialkot 4.6 953679

Monitoring Site selection Criteria

Since it is not possible to monitor everywhere in the province, so the air monitoring stations are

proposed for five large cities and 13 intermediate cities of Punjab. The initial selection of air

monitoring sites/locations in the city was based on following factors/layers:

Population

Industrial Clusters

Built-up area

Roads



The exact location of a site is most often dependent on the logistics of the area chosen for

monitoring, such as site access, security, and power availability.

Proposed Monitoring Network

The 81 proposed sampling locations are listed in table 1.3, using the above mentioned criteria.

Table 5.2: Proposed Air Quality Monitoring Locations

AM_ID City Name Latitude Longitude Site Type

1 Bahawalpur Machi Bazar 29.39422 71.675923 Market

2 Bahawalpur Near Dr Raja Rd 29.40817 71.668939 City

3 Bahawalpur 29.3829 71.660373 Residential

4 Chiniot 31.71978 72.973651 Roadside

5 Chiniot 31.71655 72.984835 Industrial

6 D G Khan 30.06715 70.630856 Urban

7 D G Khan 30.05034 70.644564 City

8 Faisalabad 31.40042 73.081186 Industrial

9 Faisalabad 31.42072 73.076376 City Center

10 Faisalabad 31.41799 73.047018 Roadside

11 Faisalabad 31.39299 73.116768 City

12 Faisalabad 31.44677 73.043032 Industrial

13 Faisalabad 31.45414 73.121423 City

14 Faisalabad 31.33553 73.418684 City

15 Faisalabad 31.43243 73.117865 Residential

16 Gujranwala Gondlan wala Road 32.17262 74.172016 Roadside

17 Gujranwala Mian Sansi Road 32.14162 74.174711 Roadside

18 Gujranwala Near Hafizabad Road 32.15695 74.157369 City Block

19 Gujranwala Chaman Shah Road 32.14368 74.204502 Residential

20 Gujranwala G.T road 32.16112 74.188416 Roadside

21 Gujranwala 32.18655 74.202999 Residential

22 Gujrat 32.57561 74.082061 Roadside

23 Gujrat 32.55285 74.088632 Industrial

24 Gujrat 32.57077 74.068205 Residential

25 Jhang 31.25861 72.307243 City

26 Jhang 31.27727 72.321349 City Center

27 Jhang 31.26863 72.330138 Residential

28 Kasur Rail Road 31.10855 74.456067 Roadside

29 Kasur Urdu Bazar 31.11987 74.44917 City

30 Kasur College Road 31.01834 73.850893 Roadside

31 Lahore Multan Road 31.35309 74.127126 Industrial

32 Lahore Ferozpur Road 31.54242 74.317762 City Center

33 Lahore Near Rohi Nala Road 31.41355 74.427675 Rural

34 Lahore Sanda 31.5616 74.299112 Roadside

35 Lahore Mughalpura 31.56589 74.3698 Industrial

36 Lahore

Near G.T Road/Bara dari

road 31.61446 74.290842 City

37 Lahore Near Raiwind Road 31.40931 74.228859 Suburb



38 Lahore Bund Road 31.53724 74.27107 Roadside

39 Lahore Jail Road 31.53861 74.33653 City Center

40 Lahore Multan Raod 31.46443 74.227028 Roadside

41 Lahore

Near GT Rd Barki Road

Link 31.59913 74.527565 Rural

42 Lahore Near Bedian Rd/Ring road 31.46975 74.429439 Suburb

43 Lahore Ravi Road 31.59719 74.299992 Roadside

44 Lahore Misri Shah 31.5839 74.334822 City

45 Lahore Macloed Road 31.57095 74.331021 Roadside

46 Lahore Gulberg 31.51676 74.344403 City

47 Lahore 31.58869 74.418384 Residential

48 Multan 30.19454 71.462096 City

49 Multan 30.18403 71.4967 Industrial

50 Multan 30.20905 71.516498 City

51 Multan 30.16934 71.468204 Residential

52 Multan 30.19496 71.481836 City Center

53 Multan 30.18071 71.4413 Roadside

54 Multan 30.22346 71.476593 Roadside

55 Muzaffargarh 30.07299 71.192378 Road Side

56 Muzaffargarh 30.08553 71.177759 City Wide

57 Okara 30.8089 73.451087 City Center

58 Okara 30.80154 73.455963 Residential

59 R Y Khan 28.41902 70.289903 Industrial

60 R Y Khan 28.42006 70.302967 City Center

61 R Y Khan 28.41038 70.303987 Roadside

62 Rawalpindi Circular Road 33.62151 73.06212 City Center

63 Rawalpindi Iftikhar Janjua Road 33.58733 73.053796 Road Side

64 Rawalpindi Benazir Bhutto Road 33.64916 73.079704 Road Side

65 Rawalpindi Ghazi Road 33.61218 73.010305 Road Side

66 Rawalpindi 33.62028 73.113666 City

67 Rawalpindi 33.57392 73.119229 City

68 Rawalpindi 33.60518 73.070929 Residential

69 Sahiwal 30.66164 73.101675 City Center

70 Sahiwal 30.67053 73.126379 Suburb

71 Sahiwal 30.65517 73.084604 Residential

72 Sargodha Jail Road 32.07168 72.66907 City

73 Sargodha City Road 32.08622 72.661003 City Center

74 Sheikhopura Sheikhopura Fort Rd 31.71145 73.991611 City Center

75 Sheikhopura Lhr_Sheikhupura_Fsd Rd 31.61948 74.247511 City

76 Sheikhopura 31.70151 73.985068 Residential

77 Sialkot Kacha Shahab pura rd 32.48353 74.51873 Industrial

78 Sialkot Haji Pura Road 32.48738 74.534028 City Center

79 Sialkot Kachehri Road 32.33111 74.349512 City Center

80 Sialkot 32.51742 74.556654 Residential

81 Sialkot 32.4967 74.524593 Roadside



Fig 5.9. Proposed Air Monitoring Network for major and intermediate cities of Punjab



GROUND WATER MONITORING PLAN

For general protection of ground waters the precautionary principle should be applied. It comprises a

prohibition on direct discharges to groundwater, and (to cover indirect discharges) a requirement to

monitor groundwater bodies so as to detect changes in chemical composition and to reverse any

antropogenically induced upward pollution trend.

Setting chemical standards may lead to think that it would be acceptable to pollute ground waters up

to the threshold level. In any case nitrates, pesticides and biocides should be regulated with standards

anyway.

Monitoring of ground water quality would need to be done 2-4/year. Samples can be taken from tube

wells or natural springs. Parameters for monitoring9 could be as follows:

Table 5.4: Ground Water Quality Parameters and Monitoring Plan

2-4 times/year Once/year Non-obligatory/additional

parameters

Nutrients (Ammonium, Total- Nitrogen,

Nitrate, Phosphate, Total-Phosphorus,

Sulphate)

Fluoride

Silver

Alkalinity Mercury Beryllium,

Dissolved Oxygen Silica Lithium,

PH Uranium Rubidium

Electrical Conductivity Nitrite Thallium

Chloride Molybdenum,

Total Organic Carbon Antimony

Temperature Tin

Aluminum Palladium

Barium Boron

Iron Bismuth

Manganese Thorium

Strontium Uranium

Zinc

Calcium

Magnesium

Sodium

Arsenic

Cadmium

Cobalt

Chromium

Copper

Nickel

Lead

Selenium

Vanadium

9 World Water Assessment Program WWAP. (Unescon raportti)



Quantity is also a major issue for groundwater. Briefly, the issue can be put as follows. There is only

a certain amount of recharge into a groundwater each year, and of this recharge, some is needed to

support connected ecosystems (whether they be surface water bodies, or terrestrial systems such as

wetlands). For good management, only that portion of the overall recharge not needed by the ecology

can be abstracted - this is the sustainable resource, and the Directive limits abstraction to that quantity.

Monitoring of ground waters should be done 1-2/month depending on the importance of the ground

water area and amounts of extraction.

Monitoring Site selection Criteria

Sampling points for groundwater monitoring are confined to places where there is access to an

aquifer, and in most cases this means that samples will be obtained from existing wells.

To describe such a sampling station adequately, it is essential to have certain information about the

well, including depth, depth to the well screen, length of the screen and the amount by which the static

water level is lowered when the well is pumped. Wells with broken or damaged casings should be

avoided because surface water may leak into them and affect the water quality.

Sampling points may include public water supply wells, domestic wells, or up gradient facility wells.

The following criteria should be considered when selecting these types of monitoring points.

Select wells that are actively used.

Choose wells that are properly constructed (with no visible damage to the casing) with the

casing anchored into bedrock, and properly capped.

Select wells that have a means to circumvent any pressure tank, water softener, or filtering

system (or any type of treatment system).

Avoid monitoring points that may have contamination from obvious nearby point sources

such as waste disposal sites, petroleum and mining activities, direct road salt or agricultural

runoff.

Use wells that have detailed construction information. At a minimum, well data should

include type of construction, size and length of casing, total depth, yield, water bearing zones

and static water levels, when possible.

Ground Water Monitoring Locations

The location data of existing bores/wells are taken from irrigation department and these existing

bore/wells are proposed for monitoring of ground water quality. A map of monitoring locations is

shown in Fig. 5.10.



Fig 5.10 Ground Water Monitoring Network for Punjab



SURFACE WATER MONITORING PLAN

The best model for a single system of water management is management by river basin - the natural

geographical and hydrological unit - instead of according to administrative or political boundaries.

For each river basin district - some of which will traverse provisional or even national frontiers - a

"river basin management plan" will need to be established and updated periodically, e.g. every five

years.

The objectives for protection of surface waters should cover general protection of the aquatic ecology,

specific protection of unique and valuable habitats, protection of drinking water resources, and

protection of bathing water. All these objectives must be integrated for each river basin. It is clear that

the last three - special habitats, drinking water areas and bathing water - apply only to specific bodies

of water (those supporting special wetlands; those identified for drinking water abstraction; those

generally used as bathing areas). In contrast, ecological protection should apply to all waters.

Ecological status refers to the quality of the biological community, the hydrological characteristics

and the chemical characteristics. As no absolute standards for biological quality can be set which

apply across the Community, because of ecological variability, the controls are specified as allowing

only a slight departure from the biological community which would be expected in conditions of

minimal anthropogenic impact (clean areas, background values)

Good chemical status is defined in terms of compliance with all the quality standards established for

chemical substances at Federal/Provincial level. There should also be a mechanism for renewing these

standards and establishing new ones by means of a prioritization mechanism for hazardous chemicals.

This will ensure at least a minimum chemical quality, particularly in relation to very toxic substances.

Nutrients, such as nitrates and phosphates, from farm fertilizers to household detergents can 'over

fertilize' the water causing the growth of large mats of algae; some of which can be toxic. When the

algae die, they sink to the bottom, decompose, consume oxygen and damage ecosystems.

Pesticides and veterinary medicines from farmland and chemical contaminants, including heavy

metals and some industrial chemicals, can threaten wildlife and human health. Some of these damage

the hormonal systems of fish, causing feminization.

Standards and threshold levels used in various countries are presented in Annex-3 of this report.

The monitoring of surface waters should serve objectives of river basin management. Monitoring of

surface waters is based on long-term monitoring of ambient environment by government (EMC,

Irrigation department and others) and self-monitoring of polluters (complemented with government

check-ups and verification). The latter will be based on obligations given to industries and

municipalities in permitting conditions. Industries in certain areas can be given an obligation to form

“Water Protection Associations”, which do the monitoring on behalf of the industries. Water

Protection Associations must have ISO 17025 certified laboratories and certified personnel for sample

taking and field measurements. Industries will pay the costs of the monitoring to the associations as

membership fees.

As a general rule:

Punjab EMC is responsible for monitoring of background values and general water quality of all

waterways and checking through periodic sampling, based on statistical analysis, the discharges of

waste waters and gradients outside industries and verifying results of private environmental firms

and Water Protection Associations of polluters (industries and municipalities).



Industries, through their Water Protection Associations or separate private environmental

monitoring firms, are responsible for monitoring of concentrations and loads of pollutants:

a) In the end of discharge pipe (and parts of processes, if stipulated in permits)

b) Several stations (5-10) outside the discharge pipe in a growing distance to the direction where

the waters are running forming a gradient

Fig. 5.10: Surface Water Monitoring Plan

The parameters, necessary for surface water monitoring, drinking water monitoring and soil

monitoring can be found in the following table. Sample taking should make according to annual

monitoring programme in each district. In each sampling day/sampling trip many kinds of samples

may be taken during one trip in order to save time and money as shown in Table 1.5.

(b)

(d)

Industries (a) (b) (c) and (d) can establish

Environmental Monitoring Associations

(EMAs) for complying with monitoring

obligations of permits and EIA NOC’s or

contract to the same certified environmental

firm/ laboratory for cost effective environmental

monitoring.

Punjab Environmental Monitoring Center (EMC) will be responsible for;

(i) Sampling as per annual monitoring plan (ambient)

(ii) Compliance Monitoring for Permits and EIA’s according to annual plan

(iii) Validation of private sector Laboratory Results by stochastic statistical sampling

(iv) Complaint monitoring from request of EPA

(a)

(c)



Table 5.5: Parameters necessary for surface water monitoring, drinking water monitoring and

soil monitoring

SN Parameters Unit Waste water

and DW Soil Drinking water

1. pH √ √ √

2. Temperature 0C √ √ √

3. Electrical Conductivity mS/cm √ √ √

4. Total dissolved solids mg/L √ √

5. Total suspended solids mg/L √

6. Chloride mg/L √ √ √

7. Fluoride mg/L √ √

8. Ammonia mg/L √ √ √

9. Total Nitrogen mg/L √

10. Nitrate mg/L √

11. Nitrite mg/L √

12. Phosphate phosphorus mg/L √ √ √

13. Total hardness mg/L √

14. Total alkalinity mg/L √

15. COD mg/L √

16. BOD mg/L √

17. DO mg/L √

18. Oil & grease mg/L √

19. Sulphide mg/L √

20. Iron mg/L √ √ √

21. Manganese mg/L √ √ √

22. Zinc mg/L √ √ √

23. Lead mg/L √ √ √

24. Chromium mg/L √ √ √

25. Sodium mg/L √ √ √

26. Potassium mg/L √ √ √

27. Cadmium mg/L √ √ √

28. Nickel mg/L √ √ √

29. Arsenic mg/L √ √ √

30. Total coliform CFU/100mL √

31. Faecal coliform CFU/100mL √

32. Flow rate m3/sec √



Monitoring of Rivers

An attempt has been made to develop a monitoring plan for five rivers of Punjab i.e. Indus,

Satluj, Ravi Jhelum and Chenab. These rivers originate from mountain ecosystems, and

deliver major part of their water resource to the plain areas of province. All these five rivers

are the tributaries of Indus River. Summary of all the five rivers of Punjab is given below;

Table 5.6: Summary of Five Rivers in Punjab

River

Name

Length

(In k.m) Place of Origin Terminates In

Sutlej 1200 Rakshastal lake in Tibet Chenab river

Beas 470 Beas Kund in Himalayas,

Himachal Pradesh

Sutlej river at Harike in Tarn Taran

district

Ravi 720 Kangra district of Himachal

Pradesh

Chenab river

Chenab 960 Upper Himalayas in Lahaul and

Spiti district of Himachal Pradesh

Merge with Sutlej and forms Panjnad

river, which flows into Indus river

Jhelum 725 Verinag spring in Kashmir Chenab river

Sampling stations on rivers should, as a general rule, be established at places where the water

is sufficiently well mixed for only a single sample to be required. The lateral and vertical

mixing of a wastewater effluent or a tributary stream with the main river can be rather slow,

particularly if the flow in the river is laminar and the waters are at different temperatures.

To verify that there is complete mixing at a sampling station it is necessary to take several

samples at points across the width and depth of the river and to analyze them. If the results do

not vary significantly one from the other, a station can be established at mid-stream or some

other convenient point. If the results are significantly different it will be necessary to obtain a

composite sample by combining samples taken at several points in the cross-section of the

stream. Generally, the more points that are sampled, the more representative the composite

sample will be. Sampling at three to five points is usually sufficient and fewer points are

needed for narrow and shallow streams.

A bridge is an excellent place at which to establish a sampling station (provided that it is

located at a sampling site on the river). It is easily accessible and clearly identifiable, and the

station can be precisely described. Usually, a sample taken from a bridge at mid-stream or in

mid-channel, in a well-mixed river, will adequately represent all of the water in the river.

Criteria of River Monitoring Sites

A sampling site is the general area of a water body from which samples are to be taken and is

sometimes called a “macro-location”. The exact place at which the sample is taken is

commonly referred to as a sampling station or, sometimes, a “micro-location”.

A basic river network can comprise sampling sites at major tributaries at its confluence and

major discharges of sewage or industrial effluent.

The initially proposed macro locations are based on following sites:

Below major population centers and industrial clusters

Where major streams enter the state

Random location to cover river stretch/length

.



Sampling location map is shown in Fig. 3 below on which sampling sites have been marked

but a final decision on the precise location of a sampling station can be made only after a

field investigation.

Preliminary surveys also help to refine the logistical aspects of monitoring. For example,

access to sampling stations is tested and can indicate whether refinements are necessary to the

site selection. Sampling sites could also be found to be impractical for a variety of reasons,

such as transport difficulties. Similarly, operational approaches may be tested during the pilot

project and aspects such as the means of transport, on-site testing techniques or sample

preservation and transport methods, can be evaluated.

Proposed Monitoring Locations

Total 89 monitoring sites are proposed considering the mentioned criteria. A list of the

monitoring locations is shown as table below.

Table 5.7: Proposed Rivers Monitoring Locations

WQS_ID River Name Latitude Longitude Type of site

1 Ravi 31.40629 74.103725 on River

2 Ravi 31.610305 74.297473 on River

3 Ravi 31.559921 74.260685 on River

4 Ravi 31.575675 74.269108 on River

5 Ravi 31.620102 74.319829 on River

6 Ravi 31.614005 74.313355 on River

7 Ravi 31.608015 74.293102 on River

8 Ravi 31.596455 74.281292 on River

9 Ravi 31.565223 74.26607 on River

10 Ravi 31.718383 74.471233 on River

11 Ravi 31.607202 74.287253 on River

12 Ravi 31.309382 73.916121 on River

13 Ravi 31.223464 73.737335 on River

14 Ravi 31.483398 74.205527 on River

15 Ravi 31.474177 74.166424 on River

16 Ravi 31.396101 74.057628 on River

17 Ravi 30.627708 71.828394 on River

18 Ravi 30.992326 73.296215 on River

19 Ravi 30.599661 72.733395 on River

20 Chenab 32.486027 74.09924 on River

21 Chenab 32.452463 74.027317 on River

22 Chenab 32.406912 73.969778 on River

23 Chenab 32.118737 73.305072 on River

24 Chenab 31.747347 72.949724 on River

25 Chenab 31.792266 72.99705 on River

26 Chenab 31.720876 72.908013 on River

27 Chenab 31.906972 73.150259 on River

28 Chenab 30.654232 71.830941 on River

29 Chenab 30.903296 71.99578 on River



30 Chenab 30.164526 71.340032 on River

31 Chenab 30.259579 71.374925 on River

32 Chenab 30.435248 71.502465 on River

33 Chenab 29.987654 71.210085 on River

34 Chenab 29.135983 70.702532 on River

35 Jhelum 32.64133 73.429804 on River

36 Jhelum 32.937798 73.749541 on River

37 Jhelum 32.919612 73.741884 on River

38 Jhelum 32.974648 73.781605 on River

39 Jhelum 32.891855 73.70264 on River

40 Jhelum 32.75594 73.592568 on River

41 Jhelum 32.56786 73.060873 on River

42 Jhelum 32.498946 72.885236 on River

43 Jhelum 32.278323 72.371248 on River

44 Jhelum 32.238602 72.332962 on River

45 Jhelum 31.559027 72.12909 on River

46 Chenab 31.356702 72.261965 on River

47 Satluj 30.074934 73.166742 on River

48 Satluj 29.412246 71.598288 on River

49 Satluj 29.444792 71.650595 on River

50 Satluj 29.649368 72.181795 on River

51 Satluj 30.643189 74.09737 on River

52 Satluj 31.086049 74.642518 on River

53 Sindh 32.590148 71.443694 on River

54 Sindh 32.545978 71.499487 on River

55 Sindh 32.464612 71.450668 on River

56 Sindh 32.171697 71.261203 on River

57 Sindh 31.684667 70.953177 on River

58 Sindh 31.045367 70.807881 on River

59 Sindh 30.944241 70.845077 on River

60 Sindh 30.086417 70.79742 on River

61 Sindh 29.920199 70.799745 on River

62 Sindh 29.643556 70.697457 on River

63 Sindh 28.93219 70.476608 on River

64 Sindh 28.44051 69.739669 on River

65 Panjnad 29.150552 70.737806 on River

66 Panjnad 29.279823 70.963893 on River

67 Soan River 33.515066 73.085418 on River

68 Soan River 33.255152 72.254232 on River

69 Haro River 33.743608 72.38322 on River

70 Haro River 33.814283 72.516999 on River

71 Kurang River 33.554419 73.10547 on River



74 Ghambhir River 32.971732 72.495307 on River



75 Ghambhir River 33.141688 72.434561 on River

76 Islam Barrage 29.826576 72.549618 Barrage/Head works

77 Punjnad 29.346413 71.020994 Barrage/Head works

78 Suleimanke 30.377725 73.866971 Barrage/Head works

79 Sindhani 30.5729 72.157865 Barrage/Head works

80 Trimmu 31.145096 72.146212 Barrage/Head works

81 Balloki 31.221625 73.859529 Barrage/Head works

82 Qudirabad 32.321202 73.685638 Barrage/Head works

83 Taunsa 30.513513 70.851309 Barrage/Head works

84 Marala 32.672508 74.46488 Barrage/Head works

85 Rasul 32.681519 73.519422 Barrage/Head works

86 Jinnah 32.917984 71.522812 Barrage/Head works

87 Chashma 32.443076 71.385975 Barrage/Head works

88 Khanki 32.404739 73.970583 Barrage/Head works

89 Gudu 28.42496 69.71786 Barrage/Head works



Fig 5.11. Rivers Monitoring Network for Punjab



Lakes and Reservoir Monitoring

Lakes and reservoirs can be subject to several influences that cause water quality to vary from place to

place and from time to time. It is, therefore, prudent to conduct preliminary investigations to ensure

that sampling stations are truly representative of the water body.

Where feeder streams or effluents enter lakes or reservoirs there may be local areas where the

incoming water is concentrated, because it has not yet mixed with the main water body.

Isolated bays and narrow inlets of lakes are frequently poorly mixed and may contain water of a

different quality from that of the rest of the lake. Wind action and the shape of a lake may lead to a

lack of homogeneity; for example when wind along a long, narrow lake causes a concentration of

algae at one end.

If there is good horizontal mixing, a single station near the center or at the deepest part of the lake will

normally be sufficient for the monitoring of long-term trends. However, if the lake is large, has many

narrow bays or contains several deep basins, more than one station will be needed.

Access to lake and reservoir sampling stations is usually by boat and returning to precisely the same

locations for subsequent samples can be extremely difficult. The task is made simpler when the

locations can be described in relation to local, easily identified landmarks. This, as well as the

representativeness of samples taken at those locations, should be borne in mind when sampling

stations are chosen. Monitoring Points of Ucchali and Namal Lake are illustrated in fig. 5.12 and 5.13

as examples.

Fig. 5.12.Monitoring Points for Ucchali Lake

Fig. 5.13.Monitoring Points for Namal Lake

Table 1.9: Monitoring Points for

Namal Lake

LM_ID X Y

1 71.80333 32.66595

2 71.80405 32.67556

3 71.80223 32.68289

4 71.80752 32.6962

Table 1.8: Monitoring Points for

Ucchali Lake

LM_ID X Y

1 72.05214 32.5628

2 72.0411 32.56222

3 72.02337 32.56123

4 72.00792 32.54777



Frequency and timing of sampling

Sampling frequency at stations where water quality varies considerably should be higher than at

stations where quality remains relatively constant. A new programme, however, with no advance

information on quality variation, should be preceded by a preliminary survey and then begin with a

fixed sampling schedule that can be revised when the need becomes apparent.

Table 5.8: Sampling Frequency

Water Body Sampling Frequency

Rivers 12 per year

Streams 4 Per year including high and low water stages

Lakes/reservoir 1 per year

Groundwater 4 per year



MONITORING OF DRINKING WATER

For drinking water we suggest a set of parameters to be measured in drinking water treatment plants

to measure the end product quality (drinking water). We also present in the same annex quality

recommendations/legal requirements for DW quality set in Finnish government decree (rules)10

.

Organic substances (like POP’s) are not usually measured from drinking water as their solubility to

water is so low and they accumulate to humans mainly through food chain. One exception is the

perfluorinated substances as they are assumed to pose a risk to human health. Concentrations of

perfluorinated substances are measured on raw water of water works. The key sources for

perfluorinated substances are airports/air fields and training areas of fire brigades if they use such

distinguishers, which contain these substances. In Sweden it has detected that 3,5 million people have

been exposed to perfluorinated substances through drinking water.

A single system of water management: River basin management (to be added later)

MONITORING OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

Monitoring of hazardous substances is an important and difficult challenge to be encountered.

Pakistan in general and Punjab within it is in high risk zone of contamination by various hazardous

substances due to various reasons, like:

- large cotton production (large scale pesticide usage)

- dumping of electronic waste from developed countries

- rapid industrialization

- dismantling of ships (in coastal areas)

Hazardous substances can be divided in three groups, namely;

- heavy metals

- radioactive substances

- organic pollutants

Concentrations of all of these substances need to be monitored in order to protect human beings and

ecosystems

Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants, which entered into force in 2004 restricts or

bans the production and use, import and export of the following 28 chemicals and by-products, which

are persistent, bio-accumulative and have capacity to bio-magnify in the ecosystems. Most of them

are long-lived chemicals, which may undergo long-range transport and travel far from their sources.

They are divided in three categories: Pesticides, Industrial chemicals and by-products.

Pesticides: aldrin, chlordane, DDT, dieldrin, endrin, heptachlor, hexachlorobenzene, mirex,

toxaphene chlordecone, alpha hexachlorocyclohexane, beta hexachlorocyclohexane, lindane,

pentachlorobenzene, Pesticide endosulfan and its isomers.

Industrial chemicals: hexabromobiphenyl, hexabromodiphenyl ether and heptabromodiphenyl ether,

pentachlorobenzene, perfluorooctane sulfonic acid, its salts and perfluorooctane sulfonyl fluoride,

tetrabromodiphenyl ether and pentabromodiphenyl ether, brominated flame retardant

hexabromocyclododecane (HBCD), Pentachlorophenol (+salts and esters), HCBD (A),

10

Decree of the Ministry of Social Affairs and Health Relating to the Quality and Monitoring of Water Intended

for Human Consumption 1352/2000



polychlorinated naphthalenes (PCN), Short-chain chlorinated parafins SCCP, Decabromodiphenyl

ether.

By-products: hexachlorobenzene; polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and polychlorinated

dibenzofurans (PCDD/PCDF), and PCBs, alpha hexachlorocyclohexane, beta hexachlorocyclohexane

and pentachlorobenzene.

It is assumed that the list of controlled chemical under Stockholm Convention will be widened to the

following in near future: PFOA, dicofol, PFHxS not yet restricted, but under consideration as new

chemical to be listed in Stockholm convention controls

Heavy metals

Three most important for monitoring are quicksilver (Hg), stipulated in Minamata Convention,

Cadmium (Cd) and Lead (Pb). None of any known living organisms need these toxic heavy metals in

their metabolism. Also Chromium is important, because of it high toxicity, especially hexa-valent

Chromium. These metals are very harmful for human beings even in small concentration.

On the other hand many metals are necessary for metabolism of many species, like zinc (Zn), copper

(Co) and iron (FE) in small concentrations, but harmful in big concentrations

EMC has currently capacities to monitor very large number of metallic elements (72) with its new

Spectrophotometer (ICP). On the other hand, other parts of Punjab are fully lacking laboratories of

environmental authorities currently. As new laboratories are established to divisions the locations of

metal and metal plating industries (all heavy metals, especially Cd, Cr, Zn), leather industries should

(Cr), textile industries (Cd) would need to be taken into account.

It is also necessary to have special training for sample takers of heavy metal samples of drinking

water samples and surface water samples, as the concentrations are always so low that the samples

are easily contaminated during sampling, in sampling bottles if not properly washed, transportation

and pre-treatment of samples.

Radioactive substances

Usually uranium is monitored from drinking waters, especially in those areas, which have naturally

uranium in ground

Monitoring strategy for hazardous substances (in the ambient environment)

Many of the POP’s are soluble with fats and therefore accumulate and biomagnify in food chains..

Therefore measuring these substances from biota is less prone biases in analysis. In water

environments the best option from where to start would be a large survey to define baseline

concentrations in water, sediments and biota. We recommend for that survey the following:

Heavy metals in rivers:

- in river mouths, confluences and upstream reference points (or points in border) (20 stations)

- along all 5 big rivers (50 stations)

- below mines and mining areas (need to be defined)

- ground waters (100 measurement stations)

Heavy metals in fish and sediment:

- in river mouths, confluences and upstream reference points (or points in border) (20 stations

in river mouths, confluences and upstream reference points (or points in border) (20 stations)

- also fish from markets from main fishing areas of communities by each river



Organics in rivers:

- HCB, HCBD, PBDE, PAH-substances, alkyphenols and phthalates

- selection of pesticides, also banned pesticides like endosulphan

- PCB’s and DDT’s

Organics in fish and sediment:

- in river mouths, confluences and upstream reference points (or points in border) (20 stations

in river mouths, confluences and upstream reference points (or points in border) (20 stations)

- also fish from markets from main fishing areas of communities by each river

- suitable spots near intensive farming areas

Based on this kind of survey a routine annual monitoring program can be established.

It is recommendable to join forces and do this kind of surveys in cooperation with organizations. Total

cost of this kind of survey in Finland is around 350 000€, but the costs in Pakistan are presumably

much lower.

Punjab EMC will also support EPA in case any emergency occurred and if they require laboratory

support e.g. identification of the chemical hazard.

MONITORING OF NOISE

Monitoring of noise should be done in agglomerations of more than 100,000 which on account of

their population density can be considered as urbanised areas. Obligation to monitor noise of public

roads could be limited to those roads with more than three million vehicles passages a year; for

railways with more than 30,000 trains passages a year; and for civil airports in which the combined

total of take-offs and landings of aircraft, excluding the take-offs and landings of light aircraft for

training purposes, numbers more than 50,000 a year.

Based on noise measurements EMC would need to produce noise maps. The noise mapping must,

using noise indicators, describe the existing and predicted noise situation in the area in overall terms,

including the quiet areas and present the number of persons exposed to the noise and the number of

dwellings in the area.

Based on the noise mapping a noise abatement action plan must be drawn up. The purpose of the

noise abatement action plan is to reduce the exposure of citizens to noise as noise have been found to

increase stress levels, reduce concentration and affecting adversely to the quality of sleep. All this is

related to cardiovascular diseases.

MONITORING OF BIODIVERSITY

Biodiversity and Protected Areas – There are a lot of action points that needs to be considered such as

an inventory of issues, promoting protected areas, national parks and community engagement.

Currently, EPA does not have a role in monitoring of biodiversity (endangered species and habitats,

migratory birds, forests, fish, etc.) and has very limited role in protecting and conserving sensitive

areas of Punjab such as RAMSAR sites.

Punjab EMC will play integral role to assess, monitor, report and possibly forecast the state of and

the pressure on biodiversity and protected areas at multiple scales. It will also help in fulfilling the

requirements of the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD).

With a support from web-based system, EMC can develop indicators, maps and tools relevant to a

number of end-users including policy makers, funding agencies, departments such as Forestry,

Wildlife and Fisheries Department, NGOs like WWF or academia/ researchers. The information can



be useful for spatial planning, resource allocation, biodiversity conservation, protected area

development and management, and national and international reporting.

COMPLIANCE MONITORING AND INSPECTION

Environmental compliance monitoring is a procedure that helps to monitor the environment in order

to enforce the compliance with the environmental quality standards and regulations. Compliance

monitoring promotes the environmental friendly businesses, ensures the facility

owners/operators/industrialists to comply and uphold the enforcement process by stopping those who

disregard the rules, sanctioning them and obliging them to rectify the damage.

Complaints monitoring

Complaints relate to events and environmental problems or perceived problems and can be useful for

management purposes and may indicate situations where consents may be required in future to better

address adverse effects created by permitted activities. It can also help to fill gaps in knowledge and

information about the quality of the environment and community attitudes.

In the long run, it may be possible to use complaints monitoring to help develop trend data and add

value to state of the environment reporting. This relies on having an integrated approach to

monitoring and reporting within EPA and other entities.

Operational Permits Monitoring

Monitoring requirements are a very important aspect of the operating permits. Assessing and

documenting compliance with permits and regulations provides information to the facility

owners/operators/industrialists to self-assess their performance relative to meeting air pollution

requirements, and to support them in determining the proper corrective actions, when necessary.

As per Punjab Environmental Protection Act 1997 (amended 2018), all polluting facilities are legally

required to obtain an "operating permit" that document how pollution sources will demonstrate

compliance with emission limits and how these pollution sources will monitor, either periodically or

continuously, their compliance with emission limits and all other applicable requirements on an on-

going basis.

The compliance assurance monitoring identifies the required permit conditions, including:

the approved monitoring approach, including the indicator(s) of performance to be monitored;

the indicator range such that operation within the range provides a reasonable assurance of

compliance;

specifications for the monitoring system and monitoring location to assure data

representativeness;

quality assurance & quality control practices to ensure continuing validity of the data; and

the frequency of monitoring, and, if applicable, the data averaging period.

Punjab EMC will do regular monitoring as per Annual Ambient Environmental Monitoring Plan.

However, it will also do monitoring upon request from EPA directorates to either check the

compliance of EQS of specific industry or monitoring as per the requirements of EIA, operational

or tradeable permits. This will help EPA Punjab to set out the core regulatory and targeted

compliance interventions and also help to promote transparency and bring an opportunity for

businesses to review and where necessary correct their practices, prior to any intervention by the

regulator.



APPROACH TO COMPLIANCE

The ultimate purpose of environmental compliance monitoring is to identify non-compliance so that a

fair action could be taken as per the approach given below;

Fig 5.14 Approach for Environmental Compliance

The Figure shows that the response of environmental compliance should be risk based and

proportionate to the actual or potential impact on the environment while considering the attitude and

compliance history of the alleged offender.

The frequency of on-site visits to verify compliance is determined by the pollution potential

(red/orange/green) and size (based on the value of capital investment) of the industry.

Table 5.6: Minimum Frequency of Inspections (Tentative)

Size of Industry Category of Pollution Potential Inspection Frequency

Large and medium-sized

Red Twice in a month

Orange Once every 4 months

Green Once a year

Small scale

Red Once in a month

Orange Once every 6 months

Green Once in 2 years

Environmental monitoring and inspections can expose 'triggers' which lead to prosecution. A

process flow has been developed for prosecution of environmental polluters in the figure 5.15.

Fig 5.15 Approach for Prosecution of Polluters

Start

Complaint

(received from

the public or

otherwise)

Public Hearing

Small EPO

Admonition/

Conditional

Fine

Complex

case?

Communication

with proponent/

Industry

Compulsory

order

Request for

criminal

investigation

Complex

case?

Yes

No

Court

Green Police

Action

Yes

No

End

Offender Disorganized Compliant Beneficiary

Enforce Educate Enable Engage

Full Force

of Law

Reward,

Incentives,

Recognized

Encourage improvement through compliance monitoring

Section 5

Policy Recommendations

for


Section 5 of Chapter 5 Policy Recommendations for Environmental Monitoring and Reporting


Section 5

Policy Recommendations for

Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Recommendations for improved environmental monitoring include;

In order to have access to environmental information one would need first to know what kind of

environmental data is already available (meta-database)

Secondly the information need to be found (web-based databases)

Thirdly, it would be necessary to have it for free of charge or on the cost coverage price (Data

sharing policy)

Fourthly, the data would need be presented in an understandable format (indicators). In order to

educate citizens and Decision Makers, environmental data would need to be interpreted to

meaningful information and distributed as EIP’s and through public media (NCEI, SOEr)

Monitoring should have legislative basis, with also provisions and obligations for data sharing

It is elementary to invest sufficiently and sustainably in environmental monitoring to guarantee

long term monitoring

In monitoring of emissions and discharges of industries as well, in case of large infrastructure

projects, the costs of monitoring should be paid by the proponent/environmental permit holder

(industries, infra constructing companies and municipalities)

There should be a monitoring strategy based on needs and economical possibilities (revised

every 5-10 years). This could be constituted through EMIN process in Punjab province level

Clear responsibilities should be set and organized in co-operation with expert institutes with

high expertise

Long-term programmes (revised e.g. every 3 years) should be laid down

Quality control and assessment needed in every phase of monitoring (planning, sampling,

laboratory work, data processing, assessment and reporting)

Annual reporting on different levels (national, regional and local) should be performed in a

regular basis

Annexure

Annexure


Annex 1 HIGH LEVEL GAP ANALYSIS OF ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES OF EPA

Component Description Current State International Standards Gaps

Equipment:

Lab instruments and consumables for sampling, testing and

analysis of air, water, wastewater and measurement of smoke

and noise.

Regional Labs (seven):

Limited and basic testing and sampling equipment; were

supposed to test 58 out of 141 parameters but can only

measure 35 (SOx, NOx, CO, O3, PM, smoke, vehicle

exhaust, noise, TDS, hardness, turbidity, color, odor, taste,

pH, Chloride, Coliform, smoke opacity etc.)

Outdated or non-functional equipment

Limited technical training and equipment handling

knowledge; 1 instrument technician per lab

Central Lab:

Most of the equipment is functional (~50%) but not in

operation as of now

Some advanced equipment was provided under Technical

assistance by JICA and is not in effective use.

Newly appointed staff (3 analysts and lab staff) is setting

up the equipment again and making them operational

under EMC project

New SOPs for water and wastewater are being tested and

additional ones are being made for specific equipment

WHO laboratory Quality standards and their

implementation

ISO/TC 48 Laboratory equipment

ISO glassware and Plastics laboratory ware

The equipment procured for Regional labs was left unused

for a long time (2012-2014) and still much is unused as it

was perceived as fake and staff did not understand it as per

their requirement and specification.

Lack of funds for repair and maintenance;

2016-2017 there were no ADP schemes that required repair

and maintenance

2017-2018 Repair head, under the Restructuring EPA

scheme, has a budget of Rs. 9 million for repair of

machinery and equipment

Lack of technical staff for specific equipment handling (Air

Pointers, AAS, ICP etc.)

Lack of capacity to bring functional equipment into

operation instead of buying new.

Limited tests, around 35, can be conducted with the few

operational equipment

Few equipment manuals and SOPs exist for conducting

analysis; e.g. SOPs for analysis of 8 water quality

parameters exist.

Time delays in complaint redressal due to delays in testing

and analysis of samples due to aforementioned reasons.

Occupational Safety and Health:

Programs concerned with safety, health and welfare of people

working in labs. This refers to the working conditions and

protective and preventive measures practiced in EPA labs

No occupational health and safety guidelines in place

Use of lab coats and gloves by some staff members

Few (only 5) and expired (since 2004) fire extinguishers

No protective gear to prevent other hazards; chemical,

biological, physical, electrical etc.

Lack of training to deal with lab hazards

No drills for times of emergency and no evacuation

procedure

No alternate emergency exits; same door used for entry

and exit.

Labs are not kept air conditioned at all times which results

in overheating of equipment and stuffy work space.

ISO 45001 sets requirement for OHS management systems

OHSAS 18001 Occupational Health and Safety

Management

USA: The Occupational Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals

in Laboratories standard and OSH Act 1970

(29 CFR 1910.1450)

Lack of provision of personal protective equipment (lab

coats, gloves, goggles)

Lack of training and drills for dealing with fire and

exposure to hazards; workers would not be able to respond

well in cases of emergency which is dangerous for their

wellbeing

Insufficient air conditioning and non-sterile environment

Lack of provision of safety measures (fire extinguishers,

alarms, showers, exits etc.)

Workers are susceptible to:

Injuries

Chemical hazards

Biological hazards

Physical hazards

radioactive hazards, and

musculoskeletal stresses

Difficult working conditions in a hot and stuffy laboratory

for the staff

Standard Operating Procedures: Step-by-step instructions to

carry out:

Sampling (composite, grab etc.)

Testing

Equipment handling, and

Lab manual

Equipment manual

For parameters of:

Water (drinking water, groundwater, surface water)

SOPs present for:

Water and wastewater (APHA Standard Methods book)

Total Dissolved Solids

Total Suspended Solids

BOD

COD

Total Chlorine

Chloride

pH

USEPA Guidance for Preparing Standard Operating

Procedures (SOPs)

USEPA Good laboratory Practices (GLP)

NSCEP Wastewater Laboratory Procedures And

Chemistry (1975)

APHA: Standard Methods for the Examination of Water

and Wastewater (22nd

edition)

European Commission Air Quality standards

Only 8 out of 32 parameters tested for water and

wastewater but capacity exists to measure 31 of 32 (except

pesticides which will also be possible after GC is

operational fully)

5 out of 16 tested for industrial gaseous emissions and 7 of

9 for ambient air but capacity to measure all parameters

exist for which equipment should be made operational

Vehicle exhaust measured by Regional labs only

Smoke opacity via Ringelmann chart only which is an

outdated method and smoke meters should be used.

Annexure


Wastewater (sewage, industrial liquid effluents, trade

effluents)

Industrial Gaseous Emissions

Motor vehicle exhaust & noise

Ambient air

Ambient Noise

Noise Emission

Discharge/Flow Measurement (water, wastewater and

flue/stack gases)

Sulfide

Ambient air and stack emissions (USEPA)

SOx

NOx

PM 10

PM 2.5

CO

VOC

And

Vehicular emissions (regional labs)

Ringelmann Chart (for smoke)

Noise

Equipment manuals are either lost or unavailable and are being

collected from various sources by new staff

Many tests are not conducted due to unavailability of testing

procedures or equipment manuals, without which they are hard

to operate.

Mobile Monitoring Units:

Instruments and equipment for ambient air monitoring on

mobile vehicles

Air Pointers (one previously but five more have been

bought)

A mobile vehicle/van for ambient air analysis (provided

by JICA)

Portable equipment and kits that can be carried to places

for testing (Regional and central labs have these) Continuous data of air (ambient and stack emissions) should be

collected by carrying out monitoring for all environmental

quality standards notified in order to check compliance by

industries and other entities.

Air pointers are not used for continuous monitoring of

ambient air.

Lack of designated technical staff and record keeping of

data

Mobile van has not been used ever though it was advanced

and new machinery. It has been dismantled for use by

water and wastewater lab staff now.

Not enough data of ambient conditions to set up a baseline,

environmental profile or assess the state of the

environment

Stationary Monitoring Stations:

Stations with equipment set up for continuous stack

monitoring

Only Two monitoring stations existed in Punjab. These were

stationed at Town hall and Township in Lahore and provided

continuous data from Apr 2007 to Apr 2011 and in 2014 but

were shut in mid-2015.

Lack of baseline and continuous data due to lack of

monitoring stations and the shutdown of monitoring units

that existed. The management claimed that their running

cost was high.

The stations were dismantled and equipment parts were

added to 3 air pointers.

Consolidated source of continuous data to assess the state

of the environment does not exist

Financial sustainability :

Rates for analysis of environmental samples

Rates for testing of environmental samples, of 32 parameters,

have been fixed by EPA on the basis of costs incurred while

measurements by using:

Chemicals

Glassware

Utilities

Services

Equipment

(Notification No.1011/LS/F-227/Lab dated 2013)

Feasible rates to provide testing and analysis facilities to

stakeholders and also to make the EPA labs self-sustainable.

Rates should be such as to provide relief to industries and

stakeholders and encourage monitoring and reporting

Rates are outdated (last notified in 2013) and need revision

keeping in view the rates of various public and private labs

in addition to costs incurred.

Labs cannot sustain themselves as labs do not operate

commercially

Certification:

EPA certifies laboratories to perform drinking water, waste

water, air, ambient air, soil testing for private entities to ensure

the quality and reliability of the data received via many of the

agency's environmental programs (EIA/IEE etc.)

22 private labs have applied for certification

2 private labs have been EPA certified, namely:

i. Environmental Services Pakistan

ii. Green Crescent Environmental Consultants

ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence

of testing and calibration laboratories

Time delays in certifications and renewal of certificates

Time delays causes dissatisfaction amongst the applicants

and hence loss of EPA’s credibility

Low quality reports in circulation due to lack of check and

balance of consultants and labs

QA/QC system:

A Quality assurance system to ensure that correct test results

are provided every time and control procedures to assure the

tests run are valid and results are reliable. These include:

Documentation

No Quality Assurance and Quality Control system exists in

EPA currently. Validity and reliability of samples and testing

is not done as of now.

WHO laboratory Quality standards and their

implementation

WHO Laboratory manual for organizing a national external

quality assessment programme for health laboratories and

other testing sites

USEPA Quality Assurance, Quality Control, and Quality

Assessment Measures

Lack of a QA/QC system for better quality testing and

analysis. Credible results would be appreciated

EPA’s credibility is questioned by stakeholders due to lack

of quality checks

Annexure


Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)

Quality Control samples

External Quality Assessment Scheme

Kit Controls

Quality Control Samples

USEPA Quality Manual for Environmental Programs, May

2000

Accreditation:

Formal recognition of the agency’s competence to conduct a

specific activity. This recognition is based on a series of

International standards which address critical issues like

competence, impartiality and integrity.

Pakistan National Accreditation Council is the body that

accredits entities in Pakistan.

EPA has prepared documentation but has not received

accreditation from any accreditation entity national or

international

PNAC Testing and Calibration (ISO/IEC 17025)

PNAC Certification Bodies Accreditation (ISO/IEC

17021)

PNAC Proficiency Testing Provider (ISO/IEC 17043)

ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems

ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems

Accreditation needed to establish credibility as well as to

enforce and regulate stakeholders/entities in Punjab

Lack of credibility of results and products in local and

international market without accreditation status.

Environmental Quality Standards:

Values defined by regulation which specify the maximum

permissible limits for pollutant concentration in the

environment

Punjab Environmental Quality Standards have been notified

for:

i. Municipal And Liquid Industrial Effluents

ii. Drinking water

iii. Ambient Air

iv. Motor Vehicle Exhaust and Noise

v. Treatment of Liquid and Disposal of Bio-medical Waste

vi. Noise

vii. Industrial Gaseous Emissions

Standards by European Commission Air Quality Directives

National environmental quality standards have been

adopted as they were with the addition of only Treatment

of Liquid and Disposal of Bio-medical Waste standards

No justification or rationale provided that PEQs set

effective and appropriate standards for Punjab

Lack of compliance monitoring; industries and polluters

are not monitored consistently to check compliance with

the quality standards

The test results submitted by stakeholders are seldom unfit

even if their pollution loads are high

Annexure


Annex 2 EQUIPMENT FOR SAMPLING, TESTING AND MONITORING

Inventory and status

S. No. Make Model Description Serial

Number

Vendor

Name

Warranty

Expiry

Unit

Price Tag

Sub

Category Status Date

Asset

Type YOP PO ID

Book

No

Page

No

Picture

Download

1. TOA DKK CM-25R Conductivity Meter with Electrode 561130 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0001

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin

g 16-Nov-17 Fixed NA 1

0 View

2. TOA Dkk HM25R pH meter with Electrode Placement EPA

Lab 113 558279 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0002

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

3. EUTECH ECO SCAN pH

5

pH meter with electrode used in field also

current placement Epa Lab 113. 1331834 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0003

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

4. EUTECH ECO Scan DO6 Currently in EPA Lab 113. Electrode not

working 443773 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0004

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g

16-Nov-17 Mobile NA 4

0 View

5. extech 407510A Dissolved oxygen meter Malfunctioned Q462254 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0005

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

6. HANNA HI9147 Faulty Serial Generated by Lab Staff DOHA-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0006

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

7.

Nippon

Denshoku

industries Co.

LTD

2000 N Turbidity Meter Calibration required 22590 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0007

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

8. Radio meter

Analytical pHm250

Functional Password required for

Calibartion 659R018N012 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0008

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g

17-Nov-17 Fixed NA 8

0 View

9. Cole Parmer Cole Parmer Hot Plate non functional HPCP-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0009

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

10. Mtops Mtops Hot Plate Non Functional Serial Self

generated by EPA Lab staff. HPMT-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0010

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

11. Advantec HTP-45288 Hot plate functional 85049 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0011

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

12. Isuzu

SEISAKUSHO EPTR-26R Furnace Functional 0127095-03 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0012

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

13. Isuzu

SEISAKUSHO KP-24R Furnace non Functional 0127079-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0013

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

14. Memmert DB-500 Owen Functional A5940084 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0014

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

15.

Medline

Scientific

LTD,UK

OF-02 Owen Functional PO59012 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0015

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

16. Blue M OV-18SC Oven Functional Micro Lab current

Placement OV1-17640 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0016

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

17. N.S engineering 145L Serial Self Placement In store OVNS-01 N/A 1-Jan-99 001022- Water & Not 20-Nov-17 Fixed NA 17

0 View

Annexure


0017 Waste

Water

Workin

g

18. Lab Tech LDO-060E Oven in store 6091109 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0018

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

19. Memmert UDT 400 Oven Placement in store Door Faulty F4950020 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0019

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

20. Ultra wave LTD

UK F0001402 Water Bath in Water Lab 45350 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0020

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin

g 20-Nov-17 Fixed Na 20

0 View

21. Thomas kagaku

Co.LTD T-N22J Water Bath Micro Lab 16824 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0021

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

22. Thomas Kagaku

Co. LTD T-104NA Water Bath in Micro Lab 16889 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0022

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

23. Mettler Toledo XS2002S Analytical Balance Display unclear 1128010703 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0023

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

24. AND,Japan GR-202 Analytical Balance 14226069 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0024

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

25. Sartorius BP310P Analytical Balance 50811507 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0025

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

26. Lovibond ET637/6 BOD Incubator 2970708 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0026

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

27. Eyela LTI-700 Incubator 10622102 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0027

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

28. Wisecube WIR420 Incubator 040074909A

G001 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0028

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

29. Hirayama FIN-610/V Incubator in micro Lab 61171162 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0029

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

30. Adrona sia E30 Deionizer 4835 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0030

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

31. Millipore Elix5 Deionizer F8PN45801H N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0031

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

32. China China Water distillation Assembly Serial self

generated by Lab staff wdch-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0032

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

33. M Tops 1 litre Heating mantle Serial self Hmm-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0033

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

34. M tops 1 litre Heating mantle Serial self Hmmt-02 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0034

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

35. M tops 1 litre Heating Mantle Serial Self Hmmt-03 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0035

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

36. M tops 5oo ml Heating Mantle Serial Self Hmmt-04 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0036

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

Annexure


37. M tops 500 ML Heating Mantle Serial Self Hmmt-05 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0037

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin

g 20-Nov-17 Fixed Na 37

0 View

38. Air Tech ADP-120 Fume hood H22687063 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0038

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

39. Air Tech BLB-1000 Laminar Flow Cabinet H226860603 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0039

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

40. Mitsubishi PS-MSAK-SE Placement In lab Serial Self ACME-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

009014-

0040

Air

Condition

er

Workin


0 View

41. Mitsubishi PS-SJAK-SE Placement in Water Lab ACME-02 N/A 1-Jan-99

009014-

0041

Air

Condition

er

Workin


0 View

42. Jenway PFP-7 Flame photometer 12162 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0042

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

43. Jasco INT CO.

LTD V-530

UV Visible Spectro-photometer Double

Beam B312660512 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0043

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

44. Hitachi U-1100 UV Visible spetro photometer Single Beam 0353-028 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0044

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

45. Dionex Ics90 Ion chromatography System Cationic

Section 6100393 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0045

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

46. Dionex ICS-90 Ion Chromatography system Anionic

Section 6100388 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0046

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

47. Dionex AS 40 Ion chromatography System Automated

sampler 6100701 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0047

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

48. HP HP-D5160 HP Printer placement water Lab MY68B120M

T N/A 1-Jan-99

007007-

0048 Printer

Not

Workin

g


0 View

49. P-selecta Block digester 6 Digestor 518056 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0049

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

50. Eyela RCN-7 Magnetic stirrer 10622369 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0050

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

51. Eyela RCN-3 Magnetic stirrer 10622172 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0051

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

52. kokusan H-27F Centrifuge Rpm are not adjustable 131918 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0052

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

53. JICA Japan DC-3 Colony Counter 61101 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0053

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

54. Lovibond oxidirect BOD tracks Stirring plate and gasket are

non functional 602847 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0054

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

55. lovibond oxidirect BOD track Stirring plate and gasket are not

working properly 602695 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0055

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

56. Lovibond oxidirect BOD Track Stirring plate and gasket are not

working properly. 602696 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0056

Water &

Waste

Not

Workin21-Nov-17 Fixed NA 56

0 View

Annexure


Water g

57. Lovibond Oxidirect BOD track Serial self generated by Lab

water staff LOOX-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0057

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

58. Lovibond Oxidirect BOD track Stirring plate and gaskets are not

working. 602845 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0058

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

59. Lovibond Oxidirect BOD track Stirring plate and gaskets not

working 601301 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0059

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

60. Lovibond Oxidirect BOD track 601450 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0060

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

61. kotobuki kakoki BL-40S Waste water treatment system Serial self

generated by lab staff. wwkk01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0061

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

62. horiba ocma-200 oil content analyzer Serial self generated by

Lab staff. ocho-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0062

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

63. GERHARDT ki-16

kjeldahl distillation apparatus 3 Flasks are

not available/Broke Downpipe for

condensate Bottle(long)

1715080077 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0063

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

64. ISCO FTD-250 Incubator 5311640 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0064

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

65. ASF thomas D-82178 Vaccum Pump 2956469 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0065

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

66. Ulvac Ba 120s Vaccum Pump 600332 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0066

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

67. ulvac ba 120s Vaccum Pump 600334 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0067

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

68.

TOYOZUMI

DENGENKIKI

Co LTD

cd220-15 Transformer 1640950071 N/A 1-Jan-99

009015-

0068

Transfor

mer

Not

Workin

g


0 View

69. stabiamatic co.

Ltd GL-1500VA Voltage regulator 41011401 N/A 1-Jan-99

009027-

0069

Voltage

regulator

Workin


0 View

70. caravell m170 Refrigerator 909030 N/A 1-Jan-99

009028-

0070

Refrigerat

or

Workin


0 View

71. nihon BMS350F3 Freezer 61100193 N/A 1-Jan-99

009029-

0071 Freezer

Not

Workin

g


0 View

72. waves deluxe Freezer WF-212 N/A 1-Jan-99

009029-

0072 Freezer

Workin

g 24-Nov-17 Fixed na 72

0 View

73. taitec

corporation SR-2S Reciprocating shaker 6091414 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0073

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

74. hirayama HVE 50 Autoclave 30606101299 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0074

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

75. eyela ca1111 Chiller 10619185 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0075

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

76. neslab neslab Chiller Serial self generated by EPA lab

staff chne-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0076

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

Annexure


77. wise circu wise circu Chiller 4.00668E+12 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0077

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

78. Wise circu Wise circu Chiller 4.00668E+12 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0078

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

79. olympus BX-41TF Microscope 6L22058 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0079

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

80. Eyela N1000 Rotary Evaporator Assembly 10616273 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0080

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

81. Eyela SB 1000 Water Bath for Rotary evaporator 60615441 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0081

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

82. ortholux ortholux Microscope Switch Adapter Missing 963728 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0082

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

83. Major science AM 180L Fermenter AM09090019

5 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0083

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

84. Major science AM 180L Fermenter AM09090019

8 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

0084

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

85. Eyela A 1000S Aspirator for Rotary Evaporator 10618211 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

1082

Water &

Waste

Water

Not

Workin

g


0 View

86. Eyela CCA1110 Refrigerated Circulator for rotary

Evaporator 10621913 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

1083

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

87. A&D company

Japan HR-60 Analytical Balance 12100977 N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1084

Stack

Emission

Workin


0 View

88. A&D company

korea EK 410I Top Loading Balance Q2600810 N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1085

Stack

Emission

Workin


0 View

89. Thermoscientific

Company USA

Thermoscientific

Company USA UV/Visible Spectrophotometer HEDN116006 N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1086

Stack

Emission

Workin


0 View

90. Japan Japan Digital Dessicator Serial self generated by

EPA lab Staff lahore DDC-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001022-

1087

Water &

Waste

Water

Workin


0 View

91. Memmert

germany U-110 Memmert Oven 40050IP20 N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1088

Stack

Emission

Workin


0 View

92. Hettich EBA89 Centrifuge 155737 N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1089

Stack

Emission

Workin


0 View

93. Horiba Japan PG350 Portable Gas Analyzer REFGOW9A N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1090

Stack

Emission

Workin

g 29-Nov-17 Mobile NA 1090

0 View

94. Horiba Japan PS300 Cooling Unit for Portable Gas Analyzer 4LLOK5UO N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1091

Stack

Emission

Workin

g 29-Nov-17 Mobile NA 1091

0 View

95. Horiba JApan PG250A Portable Gas Analyzer 250 FOUO2YOT N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1092

Stack

Emission

Not

Workin

g


0 View

96. Horiba Japan PS 200 Cooling Unit for Portable Gas Analyzer 250 HOOOOV4R N/A 1-Jan-99

001024-

1093

Stack

Emission

Not

Workin

g


0 View

97. Amtek Spectroblue

FMT-26

Inductivity Coupled Plasma Spectrometer

ICP-OES 16001887 N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1094

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Workin

g 4-Dec-17 Fixed NA 1094

0 View

98. Amtek ASX 280 ICP auto sampler 021614A280 N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1095

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Workin


0 View

99. Perkin ELEmer AAnalyst-800 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer AAS 800S7020301 N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1096

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Not

Workin4-Dec-17 Fixed NA 1096

0 View

Annexure


g

100. Perkin Elemer AS-800 Auto sampler 801S7021301 N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1097

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Not

Workin

g

4-Dec-17 Fixed NA 1097

0 View

101. Perkin Elemer Clarus 500 Gas Chromatograph(GC)(FID/ECD) 650N6121802 N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1098

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Not

Workin

g


0 View

102. GAST-USA GAST-USA IDEX Compressor system 3HBE-31T-

M303X N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1099

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Workin


0 View

103. GAST USA 3HBE-31T-

M303X IDEX Compressor system

(269)926-

6171 MICH N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1100

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Workin


0 View

104. Atonpar multiwave 3000 Microwave Reaction System 80093923 N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1101

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Workin


0 View

105. Perkin Elemer AA Accessory

AAnalyst 800

Cooling System (Chiller) of AAnalyst 800

AAS 319S7011903 N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1102

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Workin


0 View

106. Master Guard E100 Series UPS for ICP Instruement 6AR3200013 N/A 1-Jan-99

001031-

1103

ICP, AAS

&GC Lab

Workin


0 View

107. TESK SD1110 UPS for AAS Lab 0611D600436

00039 N/A 1-Jan-99

009032-

1104 UPS

Not

Workin

g


0 View

108. HP HP laserjet

M604 Enterprise HP laserjet Printer lab ICP

CNCXH9011

R N/A 1-Jan-99

007007-

1105 Printer

Workin


0 View

109. HP HP laserjet 1020 HP laserjet 1020 CNC0497978 N/A 1-Jan-99

007007-

1106 Printer

Not

Workin

g


0 View

110. HP Hp Deskjet

D4160 HP Dekjet D4160 for GC Lab TH71TD20PR N/A 1-Jan-99

007007-

1107 Printer

Not

Workin

g


0 View

111. Dell Optiplex Dell optiplex

9020 Corei7 Dell optiplex 9020 core i7 in ICP lab FW7KX52 N/A 1-Jan-99

007008-

1108 Desktop

Workin


0 View

112. Dell BO-120 LCD in ICP lab CN00NODK N/A 1-Jan-99

007033-

1109 LCD

Workin


0 View

113. LG Pentium 4 Desktop LG AAS Lab 60901321 N/A 1-Jan-99

007008-

1110 Desktop

Not

Workin

g


0 View

114. Viewsonic VS11534 LCD AAS Lab QFk07050212

7 N/A 1-Jan-99

007033-

1111 LCD

Workin


0 View

115. LG Pentium 4 Desktop LG AAS Lab attached with GC 60901424 N/A 1-Jan-99

007008-

1112 Desktop

Not

Workin

g


0 View

116. ViewSonic VS11534 LCD AAS Lab QFK0705030

22 N/A 1-Jan-99

007033-

1113 LCD

Not

Workin

g


0 View

117. Electrolux Thunder SEA-2450-TR N/A 1-Jan-99

009014-

1114

Air

Condition

er

Workin


0 View

118. LG TS-C186KLA2 AC in AAS Lab 3850A28149C N/A 1-Jan-99

009014-

1115

Air

Condition

er

Not

Workin

g


0 View

119. ICP-CY-01 ICP-CY-01 ICP-CY-01 Argon gas ICP Lab ICP-CY-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001017-

1116

Gas

Cylinder

Workin

g 12-Dec-17

Consu

mables NA 1116

0 View

120. ICP-CY-02 ICP-CY-02 ICP-CY-02 Argon Gas ICP-CY-02 N/A 1-Jan-99

001017-

1117

Gas

Cylinder

Workin

g 12-Dec-17

Consu

mables NA 1117

0 View


001017-

1118

Gas

Cylinder

Workin

g 12-Dec-17

Consu

mables NA 1118

0 View

122. AAS-CY-01 AAS-CY-01 AAS-CY-01 Helium Gas AAS-CY-01 N/A 1-Jan-99

001017-

1119

Gas

Cylinder

Not

Workin

g


0 View

Annexure


123. AAS-CY-02 AAS-CY-02 AAS-CY-02 Hydrogen Gas AAS-CY-02 N/A 1-Jan-99

001017-

1120

Gas

Cylinder

Not

Workin

g

12-Dec-17 Consu

mables NA 1120

0 View

124. AAS-CY-03 AAS-CY-03 AAS-CY-03 Hydrogen Gas AAS-CY-03 N/A 1-Jan-99

001017-

1121

Gas

Cylinder

Not

Workin

g

12-Dec-17 Consu

mables NA 1121

0 View

125. AAS-CY-04 AAS-CY-04 AAS-CY-04 Nitrogen Dioxide gAs AAS-CY-04 N/A 1-Jan-99

001017-

1122

Gas

Cylinder

Not

Workin

g

12-Dec-17 Consu

mables NA 1122

0 View

126. AAS-CY-05 AAS-CY-05 AAS-CY-05 Nitrogen Dioxide AAS-CY-05 N/A 1-Jan-99

001017-

1123

Gas

Cylinder

Workin

g 12-Dec-17

Consu

mables NA 1123

0 View

127. ICP-CY-04 ICP-CY-04 ICP-CY-04 Argon ICP-CY-04 N/A 1-Jan-99

001017-

1124

Gas

Cylinder

Workin

g 12-Dec-17

Consu

mables NA 1124

0 View


001017-

1125

Gas

Cylinder

Workin

g 12-Dec-17

Consu

mables NA 1125

0 View

129. Recordum 801-000300

Accessories of Air Pointer: Wall Mounting

Air Pointer Permeation tube SO2 Air

Pointer Permeation tube H2S Air Pointer

Permeation tube NO2 Compact Weather

Station, WS500 Laptop, HP Envy 15

Notebook Honda Petrol Generator 5 KVA

Calibration Gas Mixture 10 Ltr Cylinder,

Components: SO2 10 ppm, H2S 11 ppm,

Nox 42 ppm, CO 91 ppm, Nitrogen

Balance, Expiry: 26/11/2017 Ozone

Scrubber UV Lamp Converter Cartridge.

Moly w/ Fittings DFU filter O rings IR

source UV Flash Lamp SOx Scrubber

Material Socket UV Lamp Assay

Consumables, 1 Year Base Unit HC Pump

Rebuild Kit Activated Charcoal Purafil

Filter Pads (Packet of 3 Filters) Extended

Life time supply filter Used, replaced with

filter in AP 602) 3 Phase / 1 Phase Wire

Zong 4G Wingle Silver Air Pointer Key

Black Air Pointer Key

2016-0577 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1126

Ambient

Air

Workin

g 29-Dec-17 Mobile 2016 1126

0 View

130. Recordum D4

Accessories of Air Pointer: Equipment

Manual Black Power Cables Grey Power

Cables CD Power Cable Extension APC

Card PM Lid Data Cable USB H2S

Permeation Device SO2 Permeation Device

NO2 Permeation Device Silver Air Pointer

Key Black Air Pointer Key UPS Rack Keys

Battery

2017-00598 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1127

Ambient

Air

Workin

g 29-Dec-17 Mobile 2017 1127

0 View

131. Recordum D4

Air Pointer # 03 , Multisensor Module for

H2S, SO2, NO, NO2, VOC, PM (BAM)

Accessories: Equipment Manual Black

Power Cables Grey Power Cables CD

Power Cable Extension APC Card PM Lid

Data Cable USB H2S Permeation Device

SO2 Permeation Device NO2 Permeation

Device Silver Air Pointer Key Black Air

Pointer Key UPS Rack Keys Battery

2017-00600 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1128

Ambient

Air

Workin

g 29-Dec-17 Mobile 2017 1128

0 View

Annexure


132. Recordum D4

Air Pointer 4 Accessories: Equipment




Permeation Device SO2 Permeation Device

NO2 Permeation Device Silver Air Pointer

Key Black Air Pointer Key UPS Rack Keys

Battery

2017-00599 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1129

Ambient

Air

Workin

g 29-Dec-17 Mobile 2017 1129

0 View

133. Recordum D4

Air Pointer Accessories: Equipment Manual

Black Power Cables Grey Power Cables CD

Power Cable Extension APC Card PM Lid

Data Cable USB H2S Permeation Device

SO2 Permeation Device NO2 Permeation

Device Silver Air Pointer Key Black Air

Pointer Key UPS Rack Keys Battery Air

Pointer Inlet Mesh Air Pointer Inlet Top

2017-00601 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1130

Ambient

Air

Workin

g 29-Dec-17 Mobile 2017 1130

0 View

134. Recordum D4

Accessories of Air Pointer: Equipment




Permeation Device Silver Air Pointer Key

Black Air Pointer Key UPS Rack Keys

Battery

2017-00602 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1131

Ambient

Air

Workin

g 29-Dec-17 Mobile 2017 1131

0 View

135. AirMetrics TAS-5.0

Mini Volume Air Sampler 2 Sample Gas

inlet Multi Impact Adaptor Belts Stand

Filter Holder Assembly Casette separator

Silicone tubes Charger Stand Not in Air Lab

As according to list provided by Air Lab

Officials

5308 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1132

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

16-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1132 View AirMetrics

136. AirMetrics TAS-5.0

Mini Volume Air Sampler 1 Sample Gas

inlet Multi Impact Adaptor Belts Stand

Filter Holder Assembly Casette separator

Battery Silicone tubes

5309 N/A 1-Jan-99 NA 001023-

1133

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

16-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1133 View AirMetrics

137. Cosmos XP-329IIIR

Odor Concentration Meter Main Instrument

1 Charger 1 Computer Connection cable &

com Port 1 Charcoal Packet 2 Filter (FE24)

2

R9100772 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1134

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

16-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1134 View Cosmos

138. Kimoto HS-7 Impinger Handy Sampler 2 Filter Holder

Connecting pipe Impingers 90154021 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1135

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1135 View Kimoto

139. Kimoto HS-7 Impinger Handy Sampler 3 Filter Holder

Connecting pipe Power Adaptor Impingers "090150422"3 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1136

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-


140. kimoto HS-7

Impinger Handy Sampler 4 Test Report

Filter Holder Filters Power Adaptor Make

AND AC-95 Impingers Connecting pipe

90154024 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1137

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile Na 1137 View kimoto

141. Kimoto HS-7

Impringer Handy Sample 5 Manual Filter

Holder Filters Power Adaptor Make And

AC-95

90154025 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1138

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-


142. kimoto HS-7

Impinger Handy Sampler 6 Test Report

Filter Holder Filters Power Adaptor AC-95

Make AND Impingers Connecting pipe

90154026 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1139

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1139 View kimoto

143. Thermo Electron

Corporation GBM 2360 BL1

RAAS volume Sampler 10 um Inlets

Holdings Ventury Thermo Electron

Corporation Ventury Serial and Model

Patent 4649760 P5424TSP

RAAS 10-

100-00635 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1140

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1140 View

Thermo

Electron

Corporation

Annexure


144. Thermo G28A

Anderson Apparatus 1 Slack tube

manometer Thermo Cylinder Operating

Instructions Refill Bottles

2016 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1141

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1141 View Thermo

145. Thermo G28A Anderson Apparatus 2 Main Instrument

Slack tube manometer Dickson Chart 2011 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1142

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1142 View Thermo

146. Castle GA214 Noise meter CGNM-01 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1143

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1143 View Castle

147. Eurisem EPA 626 Sound Level Meter 1 SLM-01 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1144

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1144 View Eurisem

148. Eurisem EPA 626 Sound Level Meter 2 SLM-02 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1145

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1145 View Eurisem

149. Casella AFC 124 Dust Detector 1 2701374 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1146

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1146 View Casella

150. Sibata Sibata JICA

Japan Air Sampler 671317 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1147

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1147 View Sibata

151. Accu-vol 2000 High Volume Sampler HVS-01 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1148

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1148 View Accu-vol

152. Nigroikawa NG500-D1 Digital Manometer 29 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1149

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1149 View Nigroikawa

153. Dwyer Series 1211 Manometer G15015 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1150

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1150 View Dwyer

154. Gas Badge Plus Gas Badge Plus Personal Gas Monitor (CO) 1 "070107V-

091" N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1151

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-


Gas Badge

Plus

155. Gas Badge Plus Gas Badge Plus Personal Gas Monitor (CO) 2 Calibration

Instrument Manual

"070107V-

061" N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1152

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-


Gas Badge

Plus

156. Gas Badge Plus Gas Badge Plus Personal Gas Monitor (CO) 3 Calibration "070107V-

062" N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1153

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-


Gas Badge

Plus

157. Gas Badge Plus Gas Badge Plus Personal Gas Monitor (CO) 4 "070107V-

090" N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1154

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-


Gas Badge

Plus

158. Gas Badge Plus Gas badge Plus Personal Gas Monitor (CO) 5 Instrument

Manual 070107V-089 N/A 1-Jan-99

001023-

1155

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-


Gas Badge

Plus

159. Gas Badge Plus Gas Badge Plus Personal Gas Monitor (CO) 6 070107V-087 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1156

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air

Not

Working

18-


Gas Badge

Plus

160. Gastec GV-100 Gastec Sampling System 1 GV-100-01 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1157

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1157 View Gastec

161. Gastec GV-100

Gastec Sampling System 2 HF tubes

(Expired) NH3 tubes (Expired) Cl2 tubes

(Expired) HCl tubes (Expired) Manual

Lubricant Rubber Inlet

GV-100-02 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1158

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1158 View Gastec

Annexure


162. Aaronia AG /

Spectran NF-5035

Magnetic Field Analyzer Charger CD9pc

software, Firmware, Drivers, Programmer

Drive & Tools)

1393 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1159

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-


Aaronia AG

/ Spectran

163. The Remix RG-01 Rain Gauge RG-01 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1160

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-

Jan-18 Mobile NA 1160 View The Remix

164.

Industrial

Scientific

Coorporation

Model 713 Regulator Serial Self generated AL-M-713 N/A 1-Jan-99 001023-

1161

Lab

Equipme

nt

Ambient

Air Working

18-


Industrial

Scientific

Coorporatio

n

Annexure


Annex – 3 SUMMARY OF GUIDELINE VALUES FOR PROTECTION OF FRESHWATER

AQUATIC LIFE IN NEPAL, USA AND CANADA

Parameter Unit

Nepal

Pakistan (the

proposed criteria) USA Canada Remarks Target

Water

Quality

Range

Chronic

Effect

Value

Acute

Effect

Value

pH

pH values should not be

allowed to vary from the

range of the background

pH values for a specific

site and time of day, by >

0.5 of a pH unit, or by > 5

%, and should be assessed

by whichever estimate is

more conservative.

6.5-8.5 6,5-9,0 6,5-9,0

EC µS/c

m NA 1500*

*in 25 °C

TDS mg/l

TDS concentrations should

not be changed by > 15 %

from the normal cycles of

the water body under non-

impacted conditions at any

time of the year;

The amplitude and

frequency of natural cycles

in TDS

concentrations should not

be changed.

1000

500-

3500*

*Dependi

ng on

crop

species

TSS mg/l

Any increase in TSS

concentrations must be

limited to < 10 % of the

background TSS

concentrations at a specific

site and time.

DO mg/l;

%

80-120

% > 60 %

> 40

% >5

> 5,5*

*Warm

water

biota; for

protectio

n of other

than early

life stages

of the

aquatic

organism

s

Nitrite

(NO2-N) mg/l NA NA NA NA

COD mg/l NA

BOD mg/l NA 8

Annexure


Cl mg/l NA

860;23

0*

640;

120*

*Short

term

concentra

tion;

Long

term

concentra

tion

F mg/l < 0,75 1,5 2,5

4 1,5

0,12

Ammonia mg/l 0,007 0,0

15 0,1 1

0,094 –

1,54*

*Exampl

e when

temp. 20-

30 °C and

pH 7,5-

8,5

Inorganic

phoshphoru

s

mg/l

Inorganic phosphorus

concentrations should not

be changed by > 15 %

from the condition which

appears under local, non-

impacted conditions at any

time of the year and the

trophic status of the water

body should not increase

above its present level;

The amplitude and

frequency of natural cycles

in inorganic

phosphorus concentrations

should not be changed.

NA NA NA

Oils and

grease mg/l NA 2 NA NA

S¯² mg/l NA NA NA NA

Na mg/l NA NA NA NA

Fe mg/l

The iron concentration

should not be allowed to

vary by more than 10

% of the background

dissolved iron

concentration for a

particular site

or case, at a specific time.

0,3 1* 0,3 * Chronic

exposure

Mn mg/l < 0,18 0,37 1,3 0,1

Zn μg/l < 2,0 3,6 36 86 120¹ 30²

¹Both

acute and

chronic

exposure,

²long

term

concentra

tion

Pb μg/l

Soft water

(60 mg/l

CaCO3)

μg/l < 0,2 0,5 4

Medium μg/l < 0,5 1 7 10 25 1² ¹hardness

Annexure


water (60 –

119 mg/l)

(chroni

c); 65

(acute)

¹

of 100

mg

CaCO3/.

²Depends

on

hardness;

if not

known:

1,0 μg/l

Hard Water

(120 – 180

mg/l)

μg/l < 1,0 2 13

Very Hard

water (>

180 mg/l)

μg/l < 1,2 2,4 16

Cr mg/l NA 0,05 NA NA

Cr⁺⁶ μg/l 7 10 200 NA

11

(chroni

c); 16

(acute)

1*

*long

term

concentra

tion.

Cd μg/l

2

2

(acute)

; 0,25

(chroni

c)¹

0,033²

¹

²hardness

of 100

mg/l

CaCO3

Soft water

(60 mg/l

CaCO3)

μg/l < 0,15 0,3 3

Medium

water (60 –

119 mg/l)

μg/l < 0,25 0,5 6

Hard Water

(120 – 180

mg/l)

μg/l < 0,35 0,7 10

Very Hard

water (>

180 mg/l)

μg/l < 0,40 0,8 13

Ni mg/l NA 0,05

0,47

(acute)

; 0,052

(chroni

c)

95,58*

*hardness

of 100

mg/l

CaCO3

Annexure


Technical Report - Environment Protection Department

Documents

Transcript of Technical Report - Environment Protection Department